2010 Charger

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE
1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 1
2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 2
3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 3
4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 4
5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 5
6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331 6
7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 7
8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 8
9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 9
10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision nicians and genuine Mopar parts, and cares about your
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all satisfaction.
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis- Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint contains the information you desire.
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet, Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
located on the DVD, and various customer-oriented items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
documents. Please take the time to read these publica- illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment
tions carefully. Following the instructions and recom- The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
mendations in this manual will help assure safe and contains a complete listing of all subjects.
enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the following table for a description of the
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain this Owner’s Manual:
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information VIN Location
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
1
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS 2
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17

▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Key FOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Removing Key FOB From Ignition . . . . . . . . . 13 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 䡵 Illuminated Entry System — If Equipped . . . . . . 18
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 䡵 Trunk Lock And Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 23 䡵 Trunk Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 ▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 46
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 ▫ Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - 䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Airbag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 56
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 2
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 73 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START position is a
spring-loaded momentary contact position. When re- Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
leased from the START position, the switch automatically
1 — LOCK
returns to the ON position. 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. It also contains
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and an
emergency key, which stores in the rear of the Key Fob. 2
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet park-
ing.
To remove the emergency key from the Key Fob, slide the
mechanical latch at the top of the Key Fob sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out of the Key Fob Emergency Key Removal
with your other hand. NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches, Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front ously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
door will cancel this feature. the ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power win-
dow switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes CAUTION!
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock all
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features),” under
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
Equipped” in Section 4.
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds After placing the ignition switch in the RUN position, the
when the Key Fob is placed in the LOCK or ACC ignition Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
position. bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. This 2
SENTRY KEY姞 condition will result in the engine being shut off after two
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unautho- seconds.
rized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
or unlocked. onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
The system uses Key Fob with factory-mated Remote possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. NOTE: The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems.
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid problems and loss of security protection.
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to
CAUTION! the authorized dealer.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and Customer Key Programming
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat- Programming of Key Fobs and their RKE transmitters
tended. may be performed at an authorized dealer.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Go, always General Information
remember to place the ignition in OFF. The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
• This device must accept any interference that may be To Arm the System
received, including interference that may cause undes- Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
ired operation. a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open or press the LOCK button on the Remote 2
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors closed, or if all doors are closed, the Vehicle Security
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau- Alarm will arm itself in about 16 seconds. During that
thorized operation. If something triggers the alarm, the time, the Vehicle Security Light will flash. If it does not
Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from illuminate, the Vehicle Security Alarm is not arming. In
starting and provide the following audible and visible addition, if you open a door during the arming period,
signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park lamps the Vehicle Security Alarm will cancel the arming pro-
and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security cess. If you wish to rearm the Vehicle Security Alarm after
Light in the instrument cluster will flash. closing the door, you must repeat one of the previously-
Rearming of the System described arming sequences.
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to To Disarm the System
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the key to the ON position.
rearm itself.
NOTE: vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Security Alarm.
becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected. The
trunk entry. Pressing the TRUNK button will not exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound, and the
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters ignition will not start the vehicle. If this occurs, disarm
the vehicle through the trunk, and opens any door, the the Vehicle Security Alarm.
alarm will sound.
Tamper Alert
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
tampering.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm. If one ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
of the previously-described arming sequences has oc- The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
curred, the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or unlock any
whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the door.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition the ignition switch disables all buttons on that RKE
switch is turned ON from the LOCK position. transmitter; however, the buttons on the remaining RKE
transmitters will continue to work. Driving at speeds 2
NOTE:
5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables all RKE transmitter
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
buttons for all RKE transmitters.
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

To Unlock the Doors • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE following procedure:
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK button
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
while still holding the LOCK button.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Press
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
Key Fob removed.
current setting, proceed as follows:
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle its previous setting.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Remote Key
Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro- NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
grammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle In- ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
formation Center (EVIC) –If Equipped” in Section 4. security alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the security alarm.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change Key Fob removed. 2
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash its previous setting.
Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal Set-
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” under
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If
alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
Equipped” in Section 4.
will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the to deactivate the security alarm.
following procedure:
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
still holding the UNLOCK button. equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Turn Headlights On
with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in following procedure:
Section 4.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
To Lock the Doors mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 sec-
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- onds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the LOCK button.
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock 3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be ignition switch in the LOCK position and the Key Fob
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, removed.
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound its previous setting.
Horn with Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the security
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) – If Equipped” in alarm. Opening a door with the security alarm activated
Section 4. will cause the alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button
to deactivate the security alarm.
To Unlatch the Trunk • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk. Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system. 2
Using the Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold Programming Additional Transmitters
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the contact your authorized dealer for details.
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
Transmitter Battery Service
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless battery.
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
NOTE:
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
(24 km/h) or greater.
housing or the printed circuit board.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of 2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
the RKE transmitter. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
into the slot and gently pry open the access door. battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
Battery Replacement
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
1— Battery Access Door
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal How to Use Remote Start
distance, check for these two conditions: All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years. • Shift lever in PARK 2
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Doors closed
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
• Hood closed
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED • Trunk closed
This system uses the Key Fob Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine • Hazard switch off
conveniently from outside the vehicle while • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
still maintaining security. The system has a
range of approximately 328 ft (100 m). • Ignition key removed from ignition switch
NOTE: • Battery at an acceptable charge level

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic • RKE PANIC button not pressed
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or Remote Start mode.
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
• For security, power window and power sunroof op-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
bon monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
in the Remote Start mode.
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start 15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
System, windows, door locks or other controls the ignition switch must be cycled to the RUN position
could cause serious injury or death. before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
To Enter Remote Start Mode To Exit Remote Start Mode without Driving the
Press and release the REMOTE START button Vehicle
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five sec- Press and release the REMOTE START button one time,
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system DOOR LOCKS
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
Manual Door Locks
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
To lock each door, push the door lock plunger on each
Start request. 2
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
To Exit Remote Start Mode and Drive the Vehicle door lock plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the RUN position.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the RUN position in
order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run” Door Lock Plunger
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the Key Fob to run.
If the door lock plunger is down when you shut the door, Power Door Locks
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is not A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
inside the vehicle before closing the door. panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsuper-
vised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be Power Door Lock Switch
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in If you press the power door lock switch while the Key
the ignition. A child could operate power win- Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle. power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov- Automatic Door Locks Programming
ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
operate. If a door is open, the Key Fob is in the ignition, disabled as follows:
and the ignition is in the LOCK or ACC position, a chime 2
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Lock Doors Au-
Automatic Door Locks tomatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)” under “Personal
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in the
door locks if all of the following conditions are met: “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped,” in Section 4 of this manual.
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
2. The transmission is in gear.
following procedure:
3. All doors are closed.
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition
4. The throttle is pressed. switch.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h). 2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
position (do not start the engine).
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
3. Depress the power door LOCK switch to lock the 2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
doors. returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the 3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
programming.
4. The driver door is opened.
5. Cycle the ignition after performing steps one to four
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
for the feature to be enabled or disabled.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
its previous setting. Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accor-
enabled or disabled as follows:
dance with local laws.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Unlock
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
Doors Automatically on Exit” under “Personal Settings
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic
power door locks if:
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped,” in
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- Section 4 of this manual.
abled.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Child Protection Door Lock
following procedure: To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
1. Close all doors and place the Key Fob in the ignition.
Protection Door Lock system. 2
2. Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK
position (do not start the engine). 1. Open the rear door.
3. Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock 2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object)
the doors. into the child lock control and pull it upward.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
its previous setting.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
NOTE: For emergency key information, refer to “A NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
Word About Your Keys” in this section. engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
Child Lock Control

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock sys-
tem, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position. 2
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock plunger to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door. Child Lock Control
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or similar object) 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
into the child lock control and pull it downward.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
switch is in the ACC or RUN position.
door windows.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window switches
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power win-
dow switches will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Cus-
Power Window Switches tomer-Programmable Features)” in the “Electronic Ve-
hicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this
manual.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
WARNING!
to the first detent and release it when you want the
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the window to stop.
ignition switch or leave a vehicle with Keyless Go in 2
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the ACC or RUN position. Occupants, particularly
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
unattended children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious Equipped
injury or death. Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
AUTO-Down Feature
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
The driver door power window switch and some model
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
passenger door power window switches have an AUTO-
down feature. Press the window switch to the second To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
detent, release, and the window will go down automati- the first detent and release it when you want the window
cally. to stop.
NOTE: passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- and release the window lockout button (setting it in the
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back DOWN position). To enable the window controls, press
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
switch again to close the window. the UP position).
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window Lockout Switch

The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim Window Lockout Switch
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
Reset TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead, The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
AUTO-up feature, perform the following procedure after instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 2
vehicle power is restored:
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
1. Pull the window switch up to close window com- button will operate.
pletely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed. The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
Wind Buffeting TRUNK button on the Remote
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the twice within five seconds.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with Trunk Release
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear Button
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
With the ignition switch in the RUN position, the Trunk TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display WARNING!
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open sym- through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
bol will display until the trunk is closed. trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
The trunk of your vehicle is equipped with an emergency Some of the most important safety features in your
release handle. It is located on the inside of the trunk lid, vehicle are the restraint systems:
near the latch, and is coated so that it glows in a darkened 2
• Front and rear seat belts for the driver and all passen-
trunk. Pull on the handle to open the trunk.
gers
• Advanced Front Airbags for driver and front passen-
ger
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window —
if equipped
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners to enhance
Trunk Emergency Release occupant protection by managing occupant energy
during an impact event
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
WARNING!
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
infant and child restraint systems. much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
NOTE: The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
inflator design. This allows the airbag to have different Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
rates of inflation based on severity and type of collision. buckled up properly.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
possible. and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
WARNING! (Continued)
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during belts. 2
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under using a seat belt properly.
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the belts are designed to go around the large bones of
vehicle or being thrown out. your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
WARNING!
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
ously injured or killed. wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat. Pulling Out the Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
WARNING!
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride 2
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal
injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron-
gest bones will take the force in a collision.
(Continued)
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a Removing Slack from Belt
collision.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
WARNING!
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be allow the belt to retract fully. 2
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos- WARNING!
sible and keep it snug.
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision, leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight. periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
your authorized dealer and have it fixed. not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
etc.).
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it it is locked in position.
up or down to the position that fits you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
1. Buckle the combination lap/shoulder belt.
latch plate.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until 2
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
the entire belt is extracted.
folded webbing.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) Mode — If
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Equipped
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is avail- Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow
able on all passenger-seating positions with a combina- it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
tion lap/shoulder belt. Locking Mode and activate the Vehicle Sensitive (Emer-
gency) Locking mode.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety Seat Belt Pretensioners
seat is installed in a passenger seating position. Children The seat belts for both front seating positions are
12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
in the rear seat. remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around Once the warning is triggered, the BeltAlert威 will con-
the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size tinue to chime and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for
occupants, including those in child restraints. 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. The
BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
worn snugly and positioned properly.
BeltAlert威 Programming
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
straint Controller (ORC). Like the airbags, the pretension-
authorized dealer or by performing the following proce-
ers are single use items. After a collision deploys the
dure:
airbags and/or pretensioners, a deployed airbag and/or
pretensioner must be replaced immediately. NOTE: Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend de-
activating the BeltAlert威.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞) 1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed belt.
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the BeltAlert威 will alert
the driver to buckle the seat belt. The driver should also
instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within long as the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled. 2
60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
position.
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s the best way to keep the baby safe.
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
with the seat belt buckled.
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract the force if there is a collision.
the seat belt.
Seat Belt Extender
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
single chime will sound to signify that you have success- when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
fully completed the programming. equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex- the airbag covers.
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating posi-
tions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags

This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
Front Airbag Components
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
1 — Airbags
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the 2 — Knee Bolsters
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
NOTE: These airbags are certified to the new Federal • Airbag Warning Light
regulations for Advanced Airbags.
• Driver Front Airbag
The Advanced Front Airbags have a multistage inflator
• Front Passenger Airbag 2
design. This allows the airbag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision. • Front and Side Impact Sensors
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental • Steering Wheel and Column
Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
• Instrument Panel
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC airbags, they • Knee Impact Bolster
are located above the side windows and their covers are
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners — if equipped
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) —
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
if equipped
trim; but they will open during airbag deployment.
Advanced Front Airbag Features
Airbag System Components
The Advanced Front Airbag system has multistage driver
The airbag system consists of the following:
and front passenger airbags. This system provides output
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the impact sensors
at the front of the car. • Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
impact that requires airbag deployment. The timing of such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
the second stage determines whether the output force is etc.
low, medium, or high. If a low output is sufficient to meet
the need, the remaining gas in the inflator is expended. Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
WARNING! SABIC airbags offer side-impact and vehicle rollover
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in
or attempt to open them manually. You may dam- addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
age the airbags and you could be injured because airbag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
the airbags may no longer be functional. The head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
protective covers for the airbag cushions are de- for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy down-
signed to open only when the airbags are inflating. ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
(Continued)
The system includes sensors adjacent to both front and
rear seat occupants that are calibrated to deploy the
SABIC airbags during impacts that require airbag occu-
pant protection. 2
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with left and right Side
Airbag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC), do not stack
luggage or other cargo up high enough to block
the location of the SABIC. The area where the side
curtain airbag is located should remain free from
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) any obstructions.
NOTE: • Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners and/or between you and the side airbags; the performance
SABIC airbags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy. could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim;
but they will open during airbag deployment.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
WARNING!
Airbags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection. ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
Knee Impact Bolsters
injury or death to infants in that position.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
the best interaction with the Advanced Front airbag.
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
risk of harm from a deploying airbag: positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
Children 12 years old and younger should always ride
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
buckled up in a rear seat.
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to information on Child Restraints in this section.)
You should read the instructions provided with your
WARNING!
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
All occupants should ALWAYS wear their lap and shoul-
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work 2
der belts properly.
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
The driver and front passenger seats should be moved some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Always wear your seat belts even though you have
Airbags room to inflate. airbags.
Do not lean against the door. If your vehicle has side • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
airbags, and deployment occurs, the side airbags will panel during front airbag deployment could cause
inflate forcefully into the space between you and the serious injury, including death. Airbags need
door. room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instru-
If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified ment panel.
to accommodate a disabled person, contact the Customer • Side airbags also need room to inflate. Do not lean
Center. Phone numbers are provided under ⬙If You Need against the door. Sit upright in the center of the
Assistance⬙ in Section 9 of this manual. seat.
Airbag Deployment Sensors and Controls The Advanced Front Airbags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
required for this vehicle.
hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or Advanced Front Airbags may deploy in crashes with
side airbags in a frontal or side collision is required. little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe
Based on the impact sensors signals, a central electronic initial deceleration.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Airbags, SABIC air-
The side airbags will not deploy in all side collisions. Side
bags — if equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners —
airbag deployment will depend on the severity and type
if equipped, as required, depending on severity and type
of collision.
of impact.
Because airbag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over
Advanced Front Airbags are designed to provide addi-
time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
good indicators of whether or not an airbag should have
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
deployed.
type of collision. Advanced Front Airbags are not ex-
pected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
collisions. sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating airbag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START ment cluster Airbag Warning Light if a malfunction is
or ON position. If the key is in the LOCK position, in the noted. The diagnostics also record the nature of the
ACC position, or not in the ignition, the airbags are not malfunction. 2
on and will not inflate.
WARNING!
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the airbags even if the battery loses power or Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instru-
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. ment panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
Also, the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
mately six to eight seconds for a self-check
away.
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
turns on the Airbag Warning Light, either momentarily
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
comes on again after initial startup.
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the Advanced Front Airbags. Different airbag inflation deploy the SABIC Airbags, depending on severity and
rates are possible, based on the collision type and sever- type of collision. In these events, the ORC will deploy the
ity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
of the way as the bags inflate to their full size. The bags
curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes
fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
half of the time it takes to blink your eyes. The bags then
covers the window. The airbag inflates in about 30 ms
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
(about one-quarter of the time that it takes to blink your
front passenger.
eyes) with enough force to injure you if you are not belted
The driver front airbag gas is vented through the vent and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
holes in the sides of the airbag. The passenger front where the side curtain airbag inflates. This especially
airbag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about
the airbag. In this way, the airbags do not interfere with 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when it is inflated.
your control of the vehicle.
Because airbag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped whether or not an airbag should have deployed.
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SABIC
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
airbags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
Front and Side Impact Sensors • Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors aid the ORC in
If a Deployment Occurs
determining appropriate response to impact events. Ad-
The airbags are designed to deflate immediately after
ditional sensors in the ORC determine the level of airbag 2
deployment.
deployment and provide verification.
NOTE: Front and/or side airbags will not deploy in all
Enhanced Accident Response System
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
In the event of an impact causing airbag deployment, if the
the airbag system.
communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of the event the If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Acci- or all of the following may occur:
dent Response System to perform the following functions:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
• Cut off fuel to the engine. sions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
until the ignition key is turned off.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is re- They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
moved.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Do not drive your vehicle after the airbags have de-
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the
immediately. airbags will not be in place to protect you.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
WARNING!
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
airbag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate protect you in another collision. Have the airbags,
the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye seat belt pretensioners, and the front passenger seat
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or belt retractor assembly replaced by an authorized
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation dealer as soon as possible. Also, have the Occupant
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING! • Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad-
vanced airbag system. The airbag may inflate
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system accidentally or may not function properly if modi- 2
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could fications are made. Take your vehicle to an autho-
be injured if the airbag system is not there to rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser-
protect you. Do not modify the components or vice. If your seat, including your trim cover and
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the ing removal or loosening/tightening of seat attach-
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not ment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accesso-
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. ries may be used. If it is necessary to modify an
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the advanced airbag system for persons with disabili-
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who ties, contact your authorized dealer.
works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system.
(Continued)
Airbag Warning Light located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
You will want to have the airbags ready to proper airbag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
inflate for your protection in a collision. While fuse is good.
the airbag system is designed to be mainte-
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
nance free, if any of the following occurs, have
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
an authorized dealer service the system immediately.
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param-
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on for eters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
approximately six to eight seconds when the ignition moment of airbag deployment, or near deployment (if
switch is first turned ON. applicable), and up to a quarter second of either high-
speed deceleration data or change in velocity during
• The light remains on after the approximate six to
and/or after airbag deployment or near-deployment.
eight-second interval.
EDR data is ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys, or
• The light comes on and remains on while driving. nearly deploys, and is otherwise unavailable.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine NOTE:
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint 1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The airbags may sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica-
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly tive of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power). download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
In conjunction with other data gathered during a com-
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General 2
plete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
used by Chrysler Group LLC and others to learn more
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
about the possible causes of crashes and associated
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. govern-
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle perfor-
ment and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
mance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, ve-
Chrysler Group LLC, such investigations may be re-
hicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
quested by customers, insurance carriers, government
data will not be disclosed by Chrysler Group LLC to any
officials, and professional crash researchers, such as those
third party except when:
associated with universities, and with hospital and insur-
ance organizations. 1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
Chrysler Group LLC (regardless of initiative), the com- preserved.
pany or its designated representative will first obtain
permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the 2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler
vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before Group LLC product.
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant. United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
4. Otherwise required by law.
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Data parameters that are recorded:
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
airbag system the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Vehicle speed
WARNING!
• Engine RPM
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
• Brake switch status can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
• Pedal position
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
• And other parameters depending on vehicle matter how strong you are. The child and others
configuration could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
Child Restraints
size.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
child. “LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section. 2
Infants and Child Restraints
• Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward- WARNING!
facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types of child
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant carriers
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
and convertible child seats.
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the infants in this position.
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be Older Children and Child Restraints
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child • Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
as possible.
CHildren)” in this section.
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
slouching can move the belt out of position.
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit • If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt- their back.
positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
lap/shoulder belt.
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
Children Too Large for Booster Seats dian residents, should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt site for additional information. http://www.tc.gc.ca/
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
WARNING!
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an where you will use it before you buy it.
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a 2
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
collision. The child could be badly injured or
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
weight and height limits.
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be • Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child re- restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy- not work when you need it.
ing passenger airbag, which may cause severe or • Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
fatal injury to the infant. restraint manufacturer’s directions.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
restraint: vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System connection to the top tether anchorages, have been
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) available for some time. For some older child restraints,
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child many child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH strap kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage
system provides for the installation of the child restraint of all the available attachments provided with your child
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing restraint in any vehicle.
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
structure.
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCH-compat-
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now avail- ible child seats so that two seats share a common lower
able. However, because the lower anchorages are to be anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent rear-
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehi-
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat cle’s seat belts.
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it 2
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located in the
LATCH Anchorages panel between the rear seatback and the rear
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint window. These tether strap anchorages are
System under a plastic cover with this symbol on it.
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forward- NOTE:
facing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a the strap.
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next, of reach of children. It is recommended that before
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchor- restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
age, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
most direct path between the anchor and the child the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat, inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
removing slack in the straps according to the child that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
restraint manufacturer’s instructions. played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
The seat belt must be in the Automatic Locking Mode in
WARNING!
order to enable a child restraint to be tightly installed.
Improper installation of a child restraint to the Refer to “Automatic Locking Mode” in this section. A
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or locking clip should not be necessary once the automatic 2
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or locking feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly belt on the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor
when installing an infant or child restraint. is activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling
all of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten web-
Belts bing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by de-
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinch- pressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
ing latch plates or Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), the retractor.
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
locking clip. Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
lap/shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
plate will keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasion-
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
ally and pull it tight if necessary.
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Rotate the cover over the anchor directly behind the
seat where you are placing the child restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting

1— Cover A— Tether Strap Hook
3— Attaching Strap B— Tether Anchor
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
3. Attach the tether strap hook (A) of the child restraint to Transporting Pets
the anchor (B) and remove slack in the tether strap Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
tions. injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in 2
a collision.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
the strap. or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
WARNING! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to your vehicle.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
strap. 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the SAFETY TIPS
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Passengers
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
mental and should be avoided.
AREA.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil WARNING!
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. The
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown in
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
“Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures” in sec-
ously injured or killed.
tion 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT
MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few belts.
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter- using a seat belt properly.
preted as an indication of difficulty.
Exhaust Gas If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
WARNING! control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode. 2
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO) fol- system.
low these safety tips:
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
out of the area.
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Airbag Warning Light
Vehicle The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Seat Belts
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
rized dealer.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Defroster
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
the air directed against the windshield. See your autho-
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
rized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside Door Latches
the Vehicle Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Tires Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, 2
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness. brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure. located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . 86
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 䡵 uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 87
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 84 ▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 ▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If ▫ uconnect™ phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
uconnect™ phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Recognition (VR) System — 䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation . . . 115
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 130
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Manual Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 ▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 ▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . 132
▫ Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . 123 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Lumbar Support — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 127 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . 134 ▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
3
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 138
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 149
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 ▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 ▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 䡵 Load Leveling System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 162
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
CAUTION!
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
dimming feature is activated. mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
WARNING!
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
than they really are. Relying too much on your forward, full rearward and normal.
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If 3
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
Equipped
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Power Mirrors After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
trim panel, next to the power door lock switch. A rotary position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
knob selects the left mirror, right mirror or off position. position.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
this section, for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Power Mirror Control

phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
audio system; the system will automatically mute your
radio when using the uconnect™ phone.
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect™ website for 3
supported phones.
For uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
Illuminated Vanity Mirror • www.dodge.com/uconnect
uconnect™ phone — IF EQUIPPED
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
uconnect™ phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. uconnect™ phone al- • or call 1–877–855–8400
lows you to dial a phone number with your cellular
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular
uconnect™ phone allows you to transfer calls between
WARNING!
the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s Any voice commanded system should be used only
microphone for private conversation. in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
The uconnect™ phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect™ features
accident causing serious injury or death.
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
Phone Button
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect™ phone
Depending on the vehicle options, either the
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
radio or the mirror will contain the two control
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
buttons (phone button) and (voice
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect™ phone. The uconnect™ phone allows up to recognition button) that will enable you to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only access the system.
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the Voice Recognition Button
system at a time. The system is available in English, Actual button location may vary with the ra-
Spanish, or French languages. dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect™ phone can be used with any Hands-Free menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the uconnect™ phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
uconnect™ website for supported phones. If your cellu- specific command and then guided through the available
lar phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset options.
Profile) you may not be able to use any uconnect™ phone
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the 3
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
phone manufacturer for details.
prompt.
The uconnect™ phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
cle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect™ phone
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
switch), if so equipped.
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
combined form of the voice command is given. You can
the uconnect™ phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
also break the commands into parts and say each part of
certain radios.
the command when you are asked for it. For example,
Operation you can use the combined form voice command
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect™ ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the combined
phone and to navigate through the uconnect™ phone form command into two voice commands: ⬙Phonebook⬙
and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the uconnect™ Cancel Command
phone works best when you talk in a normal conversa- At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
tional tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
feet/meters away from you. few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section. Pair (Link) uconnect™ phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect™ phone, you must pair
Help Command
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
the beep. The uconnect™ phone will play all the options your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The uconnect™
at any prompt if you ask for help. website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
To activate the uconnect™ phone from idle, simply press The following are general phone to uconnect™ phone
the button and follow the audible prompts for pairing instructions:
directions. All uconnect™ phone sessions begin with a • Press the button to begin.
press of the button on the radio control head.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
follow the audible prompts. vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
uconnect™ phone will use the priority three cellular
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to 3
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
Dial by Saying a Number
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect™ phone a name for your cellular • Press the button to begin.
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
⬙Dial.⬙
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a • The system will prompt you to say the number you
priority level between one and seven, with one being want to call.
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect™ phone. However, at any • For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use, • The uconnect™ phone will confirm the phone number
connected to your uconnect™ phone. The priority and then dial. The number will appear in the display
allows the uconnect™ phone to know which cellular of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name Add Names to Your uconnect™ Phonebook
• Press the button to begin. NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect™ phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
“Call.⬙ • Press the button to begin.
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
person you want to call. ⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
the name of the person you want to call. For example, long names helps the voice recognition and it is
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previ- recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
ously stored name entry in the uconnect™ phonebook ⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
uconnect™ Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
• The uconnect™ system will confirm the name and entry, if desired.
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
may appear in the display of certain radios.
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone- • To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect™)
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the Name” section.
main menu.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
The uconnect™ phone will allow you to enter up to 32 as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
names in the phonebook with each name having up to made to the uconnect™ phone, for example, after you 3
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each start the vehicle.
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
supported by your phone, uconnect™ phone automati- loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
cally downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook. to the uconnect™ phone.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook • Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
Transfer From Cellular Phone loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
uconnect™ phone automatically downloads names (text able, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s for use.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellu-
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect™ lar phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded. NOTE:
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone- • The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
book. transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or • Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
deleted on the uconnect™ phone. These can only be are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are trans- and you may see a message on the phone display that
ferred and updated to uconnect™ phone on the next the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
phone connection. first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect™ phone, and then send the address book
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect™
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
phone allows the user to download entries from their phone
Bluetooth威 connection.
via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the button
and say “Phonebook Download.” The system prompts, • If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
“Ready to accept “V” card entry via Bluetooth威…” The will only use the first 24 characters.
system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your
phone using the Bluetooth威 Object Exchange Profile
(OBEX). Please see your phone Owner’s Manual for specific
instructions on how to send these entries from your phone.
Edit uconnect™ Phonebook Entries After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
NOTE:
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
to the main menu.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be 3
number to a name entry that already exists in the
deleted or edited.
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
• Press the button to begin. cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say feature.
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
Delete uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit. NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit. • Press the button to begin.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
phonebook entry that you are editing. ⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will Delete/Erase “All” uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
• Press the button to begin.
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook ⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
• The uconnect™ phone will ask you to verify that you
from the list, press the button while the
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
uconnect™ phone is playing the desired entry and say
⬙Delete.⬙ • After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• After you enter the name, the uconnect™ phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home, • Note that only the phonebook in the current language
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you is deleted.
wish to delete.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current deleted or edited.
language is deleted.
List All Names in the uconnect™ Phonebook
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say Phone Call Features
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙ The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect™ phone if the feature(s) are available on your
• The uconnect™ phone will play the names of all the
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
book entries, if available.
accessed through the uconnect™ phone. Check with your 3
• To call one of the names in the list, press the cellular service provider for the features that you have.
button during the playing of the desired name, and Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
say ⬙Call.⬙ Currently in Progress
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙ When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
operations at this point. uconnect™ phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
• The uconnect™ phone will then prompt you as to the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
number designation you wish to call.
call, press and hold the button until you hear a
• The selected number will be dialed. single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call progress. To go back to the first call, refer to ⬙Toggling
Currently in Progress Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine two calls, refer
If a call is currently in progress and you have another to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
cellular phone. Press the button to place the current
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
NOTE: The uconnect™ phone compatible phones in the button until you hear a single beep.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Toggling Between Calls
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
Progress switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or ⬙Call⬙ followed by Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call.
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
The first call will be on hold while the second call is in
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while ⬙Redial.⬙
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as • The uconnect™ phone will call the last number that
described under ⬙Making a Second Call While Current was dialed from your cellular phone.
Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the 3
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into uconnect™ phone.
one conference call. Call Continuation
Call Termination Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the uconnect™ phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell continue on the uconnect™ phone either until the call
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
and hold the button until you hear a single beep. cessation of the call on the uconnect™ phone and
Redial transfer of the call to the cellular phone.

• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
continue on the uconnect™ phone for a certain dura- voice commands will be in that language.
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
NOTE: After every uconnect™ phone language change
from the uconnect™ phone to the cellular phone.
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
• An active call is automatically transferred to the cellu- book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
lar phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF. specific and usable across all languages.
uconnect™ phone Features Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
Language Selection
reachable:
To change the language that the uconnect™ phone is
using: • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect™ phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
the name of the language you wish to switch to
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
WARNING!
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect™ phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num- Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and uconnect™ phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
Mexico. in emergency situations, when the cellular phone has
NOTE:
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect™ 3
phone.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Towing Assistance
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
If you need towing assistance:
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area. • Press the button to begin.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
some systems. To do this, press the button and say ⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
NOTE:
• The uconnect™ phone does slightly lower your chances • The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
cellular phone directly. 2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour Working with Automated Systems
⬙Towing Assistance⬙ coverage details in the Warranty This method is used in instances where one generally has
Information Booklet and on the 24–Hour Towing to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
Assistance Card. navigating through an automated telephone system.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on You can use your uconnect™ phone to access a voice mail
some systems. To do this, press the button and system or an automated service, such as a paging service
say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”. or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
Paging
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect™ phone.
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of When calling a number with your uconnect™ phone that
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
work properly with the uconnect™ phone. on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
Voice Mail Calling
by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if required to enter
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can
with Automated Systems.⬙
press the button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a
number, or sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is
also to be used for navigating through an automated Barge In - Overriding Prompts
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
number on a pager. wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
You can also send stored uconnect™ phonebook entries
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
a...,⬙ you could press the button and say, ⬙Pair a 3
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The Phone⬙ to select that option without having to listen to
the rest of the voice prompt.
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send. Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
The uconnect™ phone will then send the corresponding Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect™ phone
tones over the phone. will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
NOTE: • Press the button to begin.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect™ phone will
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time play the current confirmation prompt status and you
out settings that are too short and may not allow the will be given the choice to change it.
use of this feature.
Phone and Network Status Indicators NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display the dial ring to the uconnect™ phone to play it on the
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
your cellular phone, the uconnect™ phone will provide situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
notification to inform you of your phone and network may feel that the call did not go through even though the
status when you are attempting to make a phone call call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
using uconnect™ phone. The status is given for roaming, hear the audio.
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad When you mute the uconnect™ phone, you will still be
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone able to hear the conversation coming from the other
keypad and still use the uconnect™ phone (while dialing party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise order to mute the uconnect™ phone:
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By • Press the button.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s • Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
audio system. The uconnect™ phone will work the same In order to un-mute the uconnect™ phone:
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
• Press the button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone • Press the button to begin.
The uconnect™ phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect™ phone • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect™ phone paired cellular phone to the • When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙ 3
uconnect™ phone or vice versa, press the button
• The uconnect™ phone will play the phone names of all
and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
uconnect™ phone and Cellular Phone being announced, press the button and say “Se-
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different lect” or “Delete.” Also, see the next two sections for an
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙ alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Cellular Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between a uconnect™ phone paired cellular phone paired with the uconnect™ phone.
phone and the uconnect™ phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say • You can also press the button at any time while
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts. the list is being played, and then choose the phone you
• You can also press the button at any time while wish to delete.
the list is being played, and then choose the phone that Things You Should Know About Your uconnect™
you wish to select. phone
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone call. uconnect™ phone Tutorial
If the selected phone is not available, the uconnect™ To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
phone will return to using the highest priority phone button and say “uconnect™ Tutorial.”
present in or near (approximately within 30 ft (9 m))
Voice Training
the vehicle.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
Delete uconnect™ phone Paired Cellular Phones ing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect™
• Press the button to begin. phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the uconnect™ phone mode (e.g., from
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
radio mode):
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the prompts.
• Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
• Press the button and say the ⬙Setup, Voice Train- • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
ing⬙ command. • Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training you.
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked • Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the 3
during a voice recognition period.
blower fan switched off.
• Performance is maximized under:
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only. • low-to-medium blower setting,
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above • low road noise,
procedure and follow the prompts.
• smooth road surface,
Voice Recognition (VR)
• fully closed windows,
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead • dry weather condition.
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking • Even though international dialing for most number
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
cents, the system may not always work for some. number combinations may not be supported.
• When navigating through an automated system such • In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of compromised with the convertible top down.
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
Far End Audio Performance
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
• Audio quality is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect™ phonebook. • low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect™ phone Lo- • low road noise,
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
• smooth road surface,
entries are not similar.
• fully closed windows,
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”. • dry weather conditions, and
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). • operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness Bluetooth威 Communication Link
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
not the uconnect™ phone. the uconnect™ phone. When this happens, the connec-
tion can generally be reestablished by switching the
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
phone off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
remain in Bluetooth威 ON mode. 3
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
Power-Up
compromised with the convertible top down.
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
3
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
zero call
one cancel
two confirmation prompts
3
three continue
four delete
five dial
six download
seven edit
eight emergency
nine English
star (*) erase all
plus (+) Espanol
pound (#) Francais
add location help
all home
Voice Commands Voice Commands

Primary Alternate(s) Primary Alternate(s)
language return to main menu return or main menu
list names select phone select
list phones send
mobile set up phone settings or phone
mute set up
mute off towing assistance
new entry transfer call
no uconnect™ Tutorial
pager try again
pair a phone voice training
phone pairing pairing work
phonebook phone book yes
previous
record again
redial
General Information NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
following conditions: mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the 3
WARNING!
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Any voice commanded system should be used only
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
• This device must accept any interference received, in- phone use. All attention should be kept on the
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation. roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
VOICE RECOGNITION (VR) SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED When you press the button, you will hear a beep.
Voice Recognition (VR) System Operation The beep is your signal to give a command.
This Voice Recognition system allows you to NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
player, and a memo recorder.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
options, press the button, listen for the beep, and say a normal speaking volume.
your command. The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
Pressing the button while the system is speaking is dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted, set to low.
and after the beep, you can add or change commands. At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
This will become helpful once you start to learn the commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
options.
To hear the first available Menu, press the button
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”, and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
Commands
These commands are universal and can be used from any The Voice Recognition (VR) system understands two
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon types of commands. Universal commands are available at
the active application. all times. Local commands are available if the supported
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are radio mode is active.
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
Changing the Volume Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the button.
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”). this mode, you may say the following commands:
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recogni- • “Next Station” (to select the next station) 3
tion (VR) system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for VR is different than the audio system. • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
Main Menu • “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
Start a dialogue by pressing the button. You may say
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
Radio FM
In this mode, you can say the following commands: To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode) this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode) • “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder) • “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup) • “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com- • “Next Track” (to play the next track)
mands:
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
Memo
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel) this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels) • “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the button to stop
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu) commands:
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu) − “Save” (to save the memo)
− “Continue” (to continue recording) System Setup
To switch to system setup, say “Setup”. In this mode, you
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
may say the following commands:
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
• “Language German”
— During the playback you may press the button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of • “Language Dutch” 3
the following commands: • “Language Italian”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo) • “Language English”
− “Next” (to play the next memo) • “Language French”
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo) • “Language Spanish”
− “Delete” (to delete a memo) • “Tutorial”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training SEATS
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog- Seats are a primary part of the Occupant Restraint System
nizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect™ of the vehicle. They need to be used properly for safe
phone Voice Training feature may be used. operation of the vehicle.
1. Press the button, say “System Setup” and once
WARNING!
you are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will
train your own voice to the system and will improve • DO NOT allow people to ride in any area of your
recognition. vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
uconnect™ phone. For best results, the Voice Training
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
using a seat belt properly.
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Manual Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired. dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust 3
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

Power Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of
the seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
driver’s seat up or down, forward or rearward or to dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
recline the seatback. The passenger’s seat will move up or cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
down, forward or rearward. properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat Switch

Power Reclining Seats — If Equipped
WARNING!
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
Use the recline control to adjust the forward or rearward
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
position of the seatback.
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner 3
only when the vehicle is parked.
Power Seat Recline Switch

Lumbar Support — If Equipped Head Restraints
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the Head restraints can reduce the risk of injury in the event
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever for- of a rear impact. The head restraint should be adjusted so
ward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired the top of the head restraint is located above the top of
amount of lumbar support. your ear.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the large
button, located on the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Lumbar Support Control Lever

Adjustable Head Restraint Removing Head Restraint

To remove the head restraint, pull upward on the head To install the head restraint, insert the head restraint rods
restraint to its highest position, push in both buttons at into each guide, apply pressure down on the headrest
the base of each head restraint rod, and simultaneously until the head restraint reaches the first lock position,
pull up on the head restraint. push the large button in and push down and adjust head
restraint to desired position.
NOTE: Ensure that the front of the head restraint is After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
facing toward the front of the vehicle. Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
WARNING! lights will illuminate for High, one for Low and none for
Off.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or Press the switch once to select High-level heat-
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints ing. Press the switch a second time to select
should always be checked prior to operating the Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
vehicle and never adjusted while the vehicle is in to shut the heating elements Off.
motion. Always adjust the head restraints when the
If High-level heating is selected, the system will auto-
vehicle is in PARK.
matically switch to the Low-level after approximately
30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
Heated Seats — If Equipped
number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
one, indicating the change. Operation on the Low-level
The controls for each front seat are located near the
setting also turns off automatically after approximately
bottom center of the instrument panel.
30 minutes.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer- 3
cise care when using the seat heater. It may cause
burns even at low temperatures, especially if used
for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
Folding Rear Seats
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
On some models, the rear seatbacks can be folded sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
forward to provide an additional storage area. Pull on the seatback above the seat strap.
loops shown in the illustration to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
WARNING!
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
of the instrument panel.
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
Hood Release Lever

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
CAUTION!
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood. To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood, until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless 3
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch

Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
LIGHTS Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent for
Headlight Switch parking light and instrument panel light operation. Rotate
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the headlight switch to the second detent for headlight,
the instrument panel. This switch controls the parking light and instrument panel light operation.
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instru- Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
ment panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, inte- This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
rior lights and fog lights. according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
Headlights On with Wipers To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
(Available with Automatic Headlights Only) while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on when the headlight switch is turned off.
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are 3
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
turn off in the normal manner.
or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights On with NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Program- of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
mable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Delay Turning Head-
Headlight Time Delay lights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-Pro-
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination grammable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
vehicle in an unlit area.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime when the fog lights are turned on.
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights are off and the parking brake is off. The
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
driving.
Multifunction Lever
Lights-On Reminder
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
when the driver’s door is opened.
steering column.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the head-
light switch. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and press the headlight switch. To turn off the front fog
lights, either press the headlight switch a second time or
turn off the headlight switch.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective. 3
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Lane Change Assist
Multifunction Lever Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
Turn Signals the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows three times then automatically turn off.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
High/Low Beam Switch
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed or when the dimmer control is Overhead Console
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light, Dome Light Position
but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation, Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
switch. lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the head- Interior Light Defeat (OFF) 3
light switch and is located on the left Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
side of the instrument panel. With the position. The interior lights will remain off when the
parking lights or headlights on, rotat- doors are open.
ing the dimmer control upward will
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
increase the brightness of the instru-
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
ment panel lights and, if so equipped,
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
the lighting in the door map pockets and cupholders.
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the park-
ing lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
and washer when the ignition switch is in the ON operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
position. The lever is located on the left side of the settings for high-speed wiper operation.
steering column.
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through
an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield
wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in any
position other than off.
Intermittent Wiper System

Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second Windshield Washers
to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
cycles. (toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
WARNING!
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for 3
could lead to an accident. You might not see other two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the intermittent interval previously selected.
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
windshield with the defroster before and during
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
windshield washer use.
and then turn off.
Mist Feature Headlights On with Wipers
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering (Available with Automatic Headlights Only)
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
wipers will continue to operate until you release the if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
lever. addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The “Headlights On with Wipers” feature can be turned
on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) (if equipped). Refer to ”Headlights On
with Wipers,” under “Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle In-
formation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column. Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The 3
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED Adjustable Pedals Switch

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and (toward the front of the vehicle).
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
driver to provide improved position with the steering (toward the driver).
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving. ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
is in REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control is
(40 km/h).
on.
The Electronic Speed Control lever, located on the right-
CAUTION! side of the steering wheel, operates the system.
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
WARNING!
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
simultaneously. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Con- when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
trol System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired You could lose control and have an accident. Always 3
vehicle set speed. leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button, located
To Set At A Desired Speed
on the end of the Electronic Speed Control
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever. The indicator light in the instrument
lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
cluster will illuminate to show that the speed
your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
control system is on. To turn the system off, push and
operate at the selected speed.
release the ON/OFF button again. The system and the
indicator light will turn off.
NOTE: To Resume Speed
• Electronic Speed Control will only function in 3rd, 4th, If you deactivated the Electronic Speed Control without
or 5th gear when in the Autostick威 mode (if equipped). erasing the set speed from memory and your vehicle
speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the
• The Electronic Speed Control may not engage if a
previous set speed. To do so, push the lever upward to
different size tire is installed on one wheel, such as the
RESUME ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot
compact spare tire.
from the accelerator pedal.
To Deactivate
To Vary the Speed Setting
The system will disable Electronic Speed Control without
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
erasing the memory if you:
crease speed by pushing up and holding the Electronic
• Softly tap the brake pedal. Speed Control lever in RESUME ACCEL. When the
Electronic Speed Control lever is released, a new set
• Press the brake pedal.
speed will be established.
• Pull the Electronic Speed Control lever toward you Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to RESUME
(CANCEL). ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning the increase. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is
ignition OFF erases the set speed from memory. tapped speed increases, so tapping the Electronic Speed
Control lever three times will increase speed by 3 mph
(4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is set, The automatic transmission will downshift while climb-
push down and hold the Electronic Speed Control lever ing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
in SET DECEL. Release the Electronic Speed Control necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
speed will be established.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever to SET DE- Control. 3
CEL once will result in a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed
decrease. Each time the Electronic Speed Control lever is WARNING!
tapped, speed decreases.
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
To Accelerate For Passing system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains slippery.
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE Courtesy/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
reading lights.
Opener (HomeLink威) buttons and power sunroof switch
may also be included, if equipped. Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
Overhead Console
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery. 3
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two or three dots/lines desig-
nating the different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Programming HomeLink姞
WARNING!
Before You Begin
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
erase all channels before you begin training.
Do not train the transceiver if people, pets, or
other objects are in the path of the door or gate. To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for up
Only use this transceiver with a garage door to 20 seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC mes-
required by federal safety standards. This includes sage states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
most garage door opener models manufactured
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener with-
handheld transmitter of the device that is being copied to
out these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–
HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan- Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training.
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can 1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.
cause serious injury or death.
2. Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm) NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
display in view. in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the hand- 4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
held transmitter away from the HomeLink威. the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” 3
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the handheld transmitter button If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAIN-
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL # ING” repeat Step 3.
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
Then release both the HomeLink威 and handheld trans- garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
mitter buttons. garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
Step 3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
handheld transmitter. 5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
garage door may open and close while you train.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna 6. Firmly press and release the LEARN or TRAINING
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is button. The name and color of the button may vary by
NOT the button normally used to open and close the manufacturer.
door).
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming successfully accepted the frequency signal. The EVIC
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter sig- display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to
nals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
transmission – which may not be long enough for
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
at this time.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are 3
designed to “time-out” in the same manner. Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage Using HomeLink姞
door or gate motor. To operate, press and release the programmed HomeLink威
button. Activation will now occur for the trained device
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
(i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system,
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The handheld
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow these steps:
Troubleshooting Tips
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position. If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for
20 seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL # • Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
• Press the LEARN button on the garage door opener to
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Program- complete the training for rolling code.
ming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
Security to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
in your vehicle.
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
20 seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Indi-
vidual channels cannot be erased.
General Information POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration num- Power Sunroof Controls
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifi-
cations were met.
Opening Sunroof — Express
WARNING!
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat- will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
tended children, can become entrapped by the “Express Open”. During Express Open operation, any
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious Closing Sunroof — Express
injury or death. Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sun- Pinch Protect Feature
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
any object, to project through the sunroof opening. the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
Injury may result. struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override Wind Buffeting
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing, Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
toward the closed position. windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur- 3
pressed. rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
Venting Sunroof — Express windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
Press and release the ⬙Vent⬙ button in the center of the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position. sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
This is called “Express Vent”, which operates regardless window.
of sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof. Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
Sunshade Operation the glass panel.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle There are two 12 Volt (DC) electrical power outlets on this
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch vehicle. Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse.
will remain active for 10 minutes after the ignition switch
Insert cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
is turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
feature.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
switch will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the
element must be used.
ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under Amps) at 12 Volts.
“Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
The 12 Volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray has
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
power available only when the ignition is in the ON or
Section 4.
ACC positions.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Front Power Outlet
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicle’s not equipped with the Center Console Power Outlet
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
WARNING! CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death: • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
• Only devices designed for use in this type of power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
• Do not touch with wet hands. plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
the vehicle. and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
electric shock and failure. vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
CAUTION! (Continued)
• After the use of high power draw accessories or Front Seat Cupholders
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be center console.
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
Front Seat Cupholders

Rear Seat Cupholders STORAGE
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
Console Features
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants elbows.
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
Rear Seat Cupholders

The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also con-
tains a 12 Volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for 3
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptop’s,
cellular phones, or other electrical equipment. The con-
sole’s front opening lid allows for easy access to these
compartments.
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped with 60/40
1 — Release button for bottom compartment
2 — Release button for top compartment Split-Folding Rear Seat
3 — Top Compartment The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
4 — Bottom Compartment. (You can access this compartment versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by oper-
ating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
armrest down.) the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap. • To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
WARNING! rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into in seats and use seat belts.
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An WARNING!
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
position) should not be used as a play area by sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could vehicle:
be seriously injured in an accident. Children • Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
should be seated and using the proper restraint heavier objects as low and as far forward as
system. possible.
(Continued) (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear Rear Window Defroster
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed The rear window defroster button is located on the
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear of the vehicle to sway. rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate 3
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be- when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or defroster automatically turns off after approximately
collision. 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
The automatic load leveling system will provide a level-
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to riding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
the heating elements: conditions.
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth approximately 1 mile (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to to complete depending on road surface conditions.
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water. If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra- 15 hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 ▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 ▫ Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD)
4
Displays — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
䡵 Instrument Cluster Description . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 ▫ Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features) . . . . . . . 193
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Sales Code (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD 䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
Radio – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 ▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 208
▫ Operating Instructions — ▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
uconnect™ phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 197 And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 ▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With ▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 218
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 218
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 199
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Connecting The iPod威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Using This Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 207
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 䡵 Kicker威 High Performance Sound System With
Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
䡵 uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio) —
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . 230
If Equipped (REN/RER/RES Radios Only) . . . . 224
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 232
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius 4
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 225 䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Selecting uconnect™ studios ▫ Manual Air Conditioning And Heating
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Control 13 — Hood Release

2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Heated Seat Switch* 14 — Trunk Release Button
3 — Hazard Switch 9 — Power Outlet 15 — Headlight Switch
4 — Electronic Stability Program OFF Button* / 10 — Ash Tray* * If Equipped
Traction Control System OFF Button*
5 — Glove Compartment 11 — Storage Compartment*
6 — Radio 12 — Ignition Switch
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
4
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTION 3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when 4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
the ignition switch is in the ON position. This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is on.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Premium Cluster
Press this button to change the display from odometer to 5. Tachometer 4
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B” The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red
to 0 miles (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to area.
reset it.
6. Charging System Warning Light
Base Cluster This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
The word ⬙Trip⬙ will appear when this button is pressed. ing system. The light should turn on when the
Push in and hold the button for two seconds when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
trip odometer is displayed to reset it to 0 miles (km). A as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
second press of the button will display the outside driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
temperature in the odometer.
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the However, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your possible.
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting immediate service is required. In this case, you may
Procedures” in section 6 of this manual. experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This the light does not come on during starting.
light will also turn on while the engine is
8. Temperature Gauge
running if there is a problem with the Elec-
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
tronic Throttle Control (ETC) system.
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
CAUTION!
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could when the turn signal lever is operated.
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
NOTE:
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either 4
engine OFF immediately and call for service. indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Airbag Warning Light
WARNING! This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or turned ON. If the light is either not on during
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling starting, turns on while driving, or stays on,
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the soon as possible.
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light 13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
This light will turn on and a single chime will System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light — If
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition. Equipped
When this light turns on, the engine temperature The yellow Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
is critically hot. If the light turns on while driving, safely / Brake Assist System (BAS) Malfunction Indi-
pull over and stop the vehicle. The vehicle should be cator Light will turn on when the key in the
turned OFF immediately and serviced as soon as pos- ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
sible. (Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6 The light should go out with the engine running. The
for more information). system will turn this light on continuously while the
engine is running if it detects a malfunction in either the
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Traction
ESP or the BAS or both.
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light — If Equipped
If this indicator light flashes during accelera-
tion, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
15. High Beam Indicator
WARNING!
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
If a warning light remains on the system may not be headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
working and you will not have the benefit of ESP or away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
BAS. Under certain driving conditions, where ESP or high beam.
BAS would be beneficial, you - if you have not
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
adjusted your driving speeds and stopping in or to
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
account for the lack of the feature, may be in acci-
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first 4
dent.
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
or when driving.
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime 17. Shift Lever Indicator — Automatic Transmission
will sound for four minutes when this light turns on. Only
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
automatic transmission.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
lights are on. properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
19. Odometer / Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Display Area Vehicle Odometer Messages
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
been driven. The trip odometer shows individual trip messages will display in the odometer:
mileage. Refer to “Trip Odometer Button” for additional
information. ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Saver Indicator
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon trans- 2drivE . . . . . . . . Vehicle is in Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
fer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the pur- 4drivE . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle is in All Wheel Drive (AWD
chaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been tCASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AWD System Fault
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading Lo tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he noFUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Fault
CHAngE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the On vehicles equipped with a Premium Instrument Clus-
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea ter, this display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions NOTE: Vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Infor-
exist. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center mation Center (EVIC) will display SERVICE AWD SYS-
(EVIC) in this section for more information. TEM if the system is not functioning properly and service
is required. Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
ter (EVIC) in this section for more information.
The ECO indicator will illuminate when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to modify gASCAP
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. The If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
ECO display will toggle on and off depending on driving filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a 4
habits and vehicle usage. “gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) / All Wheel Drive (AWD)
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
Displays (Base Cluster)
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
On vehicles equipped with a Base Instrument Cluster, the
the vehicle is started.
odometer will display “2drivE” when the vehicle is in
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD), and “4drivE” when All Wheel A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
Drive (AWD) is activated. may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
If the odometer displays the “tCASE” warning message Lo tirE
after engine start up, or during driving, the AWD system When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
is not functioning properly and service is required. display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE TRIP ODOMETER button on the instrument cluster. To
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the reset the oil change indicator system (after performing
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or the scheduled maintenance) perform the following pro-
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom- cedure:
eter display area. For more information on fuses and fuse
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
locations refer to “Fuses” in Section 7.
start the engine).
CHAngE OIL (Base Cluster)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style. 20. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
including brake fluid level and parking brake
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
anti-lock brake system reservoir. dropped below a specified level.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and 4
the brake fluid level checked.
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) sys-
tem. In this case, the light will remain on until the If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to sary.
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during WARNING!
each stop.
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System 21. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. until the vehicle is disarmed.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
ON position. The light should illuminate for approxi- should be checked monthly, when cold and
mately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
by an authorized dealer. has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
tires.)
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as approximately one minute and then remain continuously
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. 4
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
low tire pressure telltale.
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
CAUTION!
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
The TPMS has been optimized for the original functioning and service is required. However, the con-
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and ventional brake system will continue to operate normally
warning have been established for the tire size if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result. 24. Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
23. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank.
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
CAUTION!
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
OBD system monitors engine and automatic damage to the engine control system. It also could
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
the key is in the ON position before engine start. If the flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
MIL does not come on when turning the key from LOCK power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
to ON, have the condition checked promptly. required. 4
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after WARNING!
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
not require towing. operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants or wood or cardboard, etc. This could
result in death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
26. Door Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that one or more
door may be ajar.
27. Decklid Ajar Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate that the
decklid may be ajar.
28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

This light will turn on to indicate the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) – IF EQUIPPED This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea- information by pressing the switches mounted on the
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
instrument cluster. • System status
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features) Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
• Compass display
Functions, Navigation (if equipped), System
• Outside temperature display MENU Status, and Personal Settings.
Button
• Trip computer functions
• uconnect™ hands-free communication system dis- Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to
accept a selection. The FUNCTION SE-
plays (if equipped)
LECT button also functions as a remote
4
• Navigation system screens (if equipped)
FUNCTION sound system control. Refer to “Remote
• Audio mode display SELECT Sound System Controls” in this section.
Button
• Surround Sound Modes (If Equipped with Driver-
Selectable Surround [DSS]) Press the SCROLL button to scroll through
Trip Functions, Navigation (if equipped),
The system allows the driver to select information by System Status Messages, and Personal Set-
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
SCROLL tings (Customer-Programmable Features).
wheel. The SCROLL button also functions as a
Button
remote sound system control. Refer to “Re-
mote Sound System Controls” in this section.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the • Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with chime)
compass reading and outside temperature,
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
AUDIO this screen will display radio and media
MODE mode information depending on which ra- • RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
Button dio is in the vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
System Controls” in this section.
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays • Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
the following messages: chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if • Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with motion)
either turn signal on)
• Trunk Ajar (with a single chime)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure
• ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — if equipped Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
• SERVICE AWD SYSTEM — All Wheel Drive (AWD)
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
system is not functioning properly and service is
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 sec-
required.
onds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
• Channel # Transmit scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
• Channel # Training
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon 4
• Channel # Trained your personal driving style.
• Clearing Channels Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
• Channels Cleared
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
• Did Not Train MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance) perform
• Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting
the following procedure:
System” in Section 2)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5)
start the engine).
• Oil Change Required (with a single chime)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
within 10 seconds. Computer functions.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you • Average Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode — If
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Equipped
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Trip Functions
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode reset.
• Distance To Empty The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
• Trip A
will appear whenever MDS (if equipped) allows the
• Trip B engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner.
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
Fuel Saver Mode — On Fuel Saver Mode — Off

This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving • Distance To Empty (DTE)
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy. the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle • Elapsed Time
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value. when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
or START position.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display will • Display Units of Measure in
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the TION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC”
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will display. appears.
• Trip A To Reset The Display
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
reset. displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button once to clear the resettable function being dis-
• Trip B
played. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
reset.
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed func-
tion. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
Automatic All Wheel Drive (AWD) Displays — If When the vehicle automatically transitions from AWD to
Equipped RWD the EVIC will display the following message for
Automatic AWD operation could be activated by outside five seconds.
temperature, wheel slip, or other predetermined condi-
tions, when the vehicle automatically transitions from
RWD to AWD the EVIC will display the following
message for five seconds.
4
All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)

Refer to “All Wheel Drive — If Equipped” in Section 5 for
more information on the All Wheel Drive (AWD) system.
Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)

Compass Display Manual Compass Calibration
The compass readings indicate the direction If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
HOME button to display one of eight compass compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
HOME readings and the outside temperature. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
Button
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
Automatic Compass Calibration two seconds.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is 3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will displays in the EVIC.
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may 4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic the EVIC.
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally. 5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences and provide the most accurate compass head-
ing. 4
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Cell Phones, Lap-
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the Compass Variance Map
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the HOME button for approximately
two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance” Navigation — If Equipped
message and the last variance zone number displays in
Navigation Display Control
the EVIC.
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the proper variance zone is selected according to the the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
map. or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
5. Press and release the HOME button to exit.
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
Equipped be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT but-
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides infor- ton will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
mation on the current surround mode.
Turn-by-Turn Directions
• Stereo The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a pro-
grammed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
• Audio Surround
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNC- EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
TION SELECT button to change surround modes.
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
indicate the distance to the turn. Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions. NOTE: The EVIC will not change the uconnect™ lan-
guage selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
Personal Settings
“uconnect™” in Section 3.
(Customer-Programmable Features) 4
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall “Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
features when the transmission is in PARK. When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Set-
To make your selection, press and release the FUNC-
tings displays in the EVIC.
TION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
choices.
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
“Language” vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
When in this display you may select one of five lan- NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Remote Key Unlock” “Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
Door 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen- your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SE-
ger’s doors. When All Doors 1st Press is selected, all of LECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE “Headlights On with Wipers”
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection, (Available with Auto Headlights Only)
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in
“Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st Press” appears. the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approxi-
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock” mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
Remote Key Lock feature. To make your selection, press button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
or “OFF” appears. causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3.
“Delay Turning Headlights Off” and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,” “Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears. min.” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock” “AWD System Displays”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
When in this display you may select “ON” or “OFF”. 4
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are When ON is selected, the EVIC displays the current
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selec- mode of the transfer-case. A five second display appears
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button any time the transfer-case changes from All Wheel Drive
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears. (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) or from RWD to
AWD. The EVIC also displays the current mode of the
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
transfer-case when you shift into drive or reverse. To
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If “Display Units of Measure in”
Equipped The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped)
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the can be changed between English and Metric units of
uconnect™ system are confirmed. To make your selec- measure. To make your selection, press and release the
tion, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button FUNCTION SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “MET-
until “ON” or “OFF” appears. RIC” appears.
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped SALES CODE (RER/REN) — AM/FM/CD/DVD
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will RADIO – IF EQUIPPED
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a desig-
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
nated turn within a programmed route. To make your of the unit’s faceplate.
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears. The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Display ECO — If Equipped Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/Tem- for easy menu selection.
perature display, this message can be turned on or off. To
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
Refer to your uconnect™ tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
System (VR) — If Equipped 1. Turn on the radio.
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3. 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
Operating Instructions — uconnect™ phone — If 3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
Equipped clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3. 4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the 4
Clock Setting Procedure word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is dis-
played. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
uconnect™ gps — RER only where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing down-
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to ward is displayed.
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the 5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
daylight savings information is set. screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time 3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
current setting: Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the radio. Changing the Time Zone
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
1. Turn on the radio.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in 2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are dis- 3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
played to change the current setting. displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
Show Time if Radio is Off the screen.
When selected, this feature will display the time of day 4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
as follows to change the current setting: want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
1. Turn on the radio. displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The 5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right position to operate the radio.
side of the radio faceplate.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. 4
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio
SEEK Buttons 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch knob to save time change.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass RW/FF
stations without stopping, until you release it. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
TIME Button
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
AM or FM frequencies.
and radio frequency.
TUNE Control
Clock Setting Procedure
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
SCROLL control knob. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second AM/FM Button
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
mid-range tones.
Memory
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third When you are receiving a station that you wish to
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
treble tones. window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto 4
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth this station and press and release that button. If a button
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
sound level from the right or left side speakers. will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the front and rear speakers. display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice. discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC Button ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button 4
a second CD if one is already loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
can cause damage to the player. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Notes on Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or file recording media and formats are limited. When
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
button works in a similar manner. tions.
AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activateSupported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
domly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats 4
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Sampling Playback of MP3 Files

Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
Specification Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files.
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
160, 128, 144, by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio 112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
16, 8 CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an SIRIUS RADIO
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
side of the radio faceplate.
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected. 4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio. Voice Recognition Button uconnect™ phone — If
Equipped
Electronic Volume Control
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
volume and to the left decreases it. available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With UConnect”
message will display on the radio screen.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played. Phone Button uconnect™ phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect™ phone feature
SEEK Buttons
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not 5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
TIME Button SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
and radio frequency. starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
Clock Setting Procedure
procedure, starting at Step 2. 4
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
INFO Button
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
SCROLL control knob. letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes RW/FF
will begin to blink. Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
AM or FM frequencies.
knob to save time change.
TUNE Control Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones. knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
mid-range tones.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
treble tones. seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
format types: Public Public
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display Rhythm and Blues R&B
No program type or Religious Music Rel Musc
None
undefined
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Rock Rock
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
Soft Soft 4
Soft Rock Soft Rck
College College
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Country Country
Sports Sports
Foreign Language Language
Talk Talk
Information Inform
Top 40 Top 40
Jazz Jazz
Weather Weather
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
station with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM Button
Music Type function only operates when in the FM Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Memory
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be When you are receiving a station that you wish to
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station. commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SETUP Button
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
station and press and release that button. If a button is
the following items:
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the be stored into pushbutton memory.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
to save time change.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
pressing the pushbutton twice. discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
button number will display. Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
Buttons 1 - 6
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the 4
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
stations).
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
DISC/AUX Button ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
MP3 Audio Play show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
CAUTION!
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
away and jam the player mechanism. convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert SEEK Button
a second CD if one is already loaded. Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
can cause damage to the player. previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD. CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or file recording media and formats are limited. When
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
works in a similar manner. tions.
AM/FM Button Supported Media (Disc Types)
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode. The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3. 4
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activateSupported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on theThe medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
domly selected track.
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems: Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
• Maximum number of files: 255 Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign Supported MP3 File Formats
a number instead. With a maximum number of files, The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
display.) designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
character extension) following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a three- rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
character extension) use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Sampling Playback of MP3 Files

Bit Rate (kbps) When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
Specification Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224, radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
MPEG-1 Audio 192, 160, 128, contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
48, 44.1, 32 time to start playing the MP3 files.
Layer 3 112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
160, 128, 144, by the following:
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64, 4
Layer 3 56, 48, 40, 32, 24, • Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
16, 8 CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not to load than non-multisession discs
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not increase with more files and folders
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
playable files).
vehicle speakers.
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
time⬙ priority mode. down.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode) feature, refer to the separate RER, REN or REZ User’s
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The Manual. UCI is available only if equipped as an option
time of day will display for five seconds (when the with these radios.
ignition is OFF). This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 into the
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone vehicle’s sound system through a 16–pin connector, using
(If Equipped) the provided interface cable.
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3. UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威 and 4
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may not
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped) fully support the UCI features. Please visit Apple’s
Refer to “uconnect™ studios (Satellite Radio)” in this website for software updates.
section. NOTE:
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF • If the radio has a USB port, connecting an iPod威 to this
EQUIPPED port does not play the media. For playing an iPod威,
use the separate 16–pin connector port (in the glove
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/ compartment on some vehicles).
REL/RET radios only with uconnect™. For sales code
• Connecting an iPod威 to the AUX port located in the
RER, REN, REP, REW or REZ touch-screen radio UCI
radio faceplate, plays media, but does not use the UCI
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞 Using This Feature
Use the provided connection cable to connect an iPod威 to By using the provided connection cable to connect an
the vehicle’s 16–pin connector port (which is located in iPod威 to the vehicle’s UCI 16–pin connector port:
the glove compartment on some vehicles). Once the
• The iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
iPod威 is connected and synchronized to the vehicle’s UCI
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
system (iPod威 may take a few seconds to connect), the
etc.) information on the radio display.
iPod威 starts charging and is ready for use by pressing
radio switches, as described below. • The iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE:
• You may have to remove the connector pin protection • The iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
cap from the 16–pin connector port, prior to connect- connector (if supported by the specific iPod威 device)
ing the cable.
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
• If the iPod威 battery is completely discharged, it may To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
not communicate with the UCI system until a mini- iPod威, press the “AUX” button on the radio faceplate.
mum charge is attained. Leaving the iPod威 connected Once in the UCI (iPod威) mode, iPod威 audio tracks (if
to the UCI system may charge it to the required level. available from iPod威) start playing over the vehicle’s
audio system.
Play Mode • Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
When switched to UCI mode, the iPod威 automatically holding the FF >> button.
starts Play mode. In Play mode, you may use the
• A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
following buttons on the radio faceplate to control the
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
iPod威 and display data:
seconds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track. • Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. If the << SEEK button is 4
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while pressed during the first two seconds of the track, it will
playing a track, skips to the next track. jump to the previous track in the list; if you press this
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one button at any other time in the track, it will jump to the
click, during the first two seconds of the track, will beginning of the track. If you press the SEEK >>
jump to the previous track in the list. Turning this button during play mode, it will jump to the next track
button at any other time in the track, will jump to in the list.
the beginning of the current track. • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
button long enough will take you to the beginning to the next screen of data for that track. Once you have
of the current track.
seen all screens, the last INFO button press will take List Or Browse Mode
you back to the play mode screen on the radio. During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, takes you to List mode. List mode enables you to
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the iPod威
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威.
mode to repeat the current playing track.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威 scan mode, which
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
will play the first five seconds of each track in the
current list and then forward to the next song. To stop • Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
SCAN mode and start playing the desired track, when wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
it is playing the track, press the SCAN button again. the track detail on the radio display. Once you have
During Scan mode, you can also press the << SEEK the track to be played highlighted on the radio
and SEEK >> buttons to select the previous and next display, press the TUNE control knob to select and
tracks. start playing the track. Turning the TUNE control
knob fast will scroll through the list faster. During
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
the information on the radio display.
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display, then the shuffle mode is
ON.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in • To Exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backwards mode.
(counter-clockwise) to get to the track faster.
• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
• In List mode, the radio PRESET Buttons are used as level menu of the iPod威. Turn the TUNE control knob
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威. to list the top-menu item you wish to select and press
the TUNE control knob. This will display the next
• Preset 1 – Playlists 4
sub-menu list item on the iPod威 then you can follow
• Preset 2 – Artists the same steps to go to the desired track in that list.
Not all iPod威 sub-menu levels are available on this
• Preset 3 – Albums
system.
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 5 - Audiobooks another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
iPod威.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
uconnect™ studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
CAUTION!
EQUIPPED (REN/RER/RES RADIOS ONLY)
• Leaving the iPod威 (or any supported device) any- Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
where in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
alter the operation or damage the device. Follow coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
the device manufacturer’s guidelines. Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
• Placing items on the iPod威, or connections to the sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
iPod威 in the vehicle, can cause damage to the dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
device and/or to the connectors. NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
WARNING! System Activation
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 while driving. Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
Failure to follow this warning could result in an may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
accident. service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www- display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents. the radio to exit this screen.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
Number (ESN/SID) While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
Please have the following information available when faceplate.
calling:
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen. 4
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
Number (ESN/SID).
Selecting uconnect™ studios (Satellite) Mode
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number. Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
mode.
ESN/SID Access With RES Radios
Satellite Antenna
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within Operating Instructions - uconnect™ studios
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly (Satellite) Mode
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
structure or under a physical obstacle. up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
cause signal blockage. tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
additional three seconds will make the radio display the seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return lected.
to normal display).
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
RW/FF type. 4
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
direction of the arrows.
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
following items: the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/SE-
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
LECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
Sirius subscription.
twice.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window. Buttons 1 - 6
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
and press and release that button. If a button is not commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
Operating Instructions - uconnect™ phone
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
(If Equipped)
stored into pushbutton memory.
Refer to “uconnect™ phone” in Section 3.
KICKER姞 HIGH PERFORMANCE SOUND SYSTEM “Audio Surround” is optimized for front seat passengers
WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE SURROUND (DSS) – for any audio source. This surround effect is available for
IF EQUIPPED audio from any source – AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or
AUX – and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio 4
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. Please note that DSS effects are
dependent on the mix of the original recording. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set auto-
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio matically. Fader control is available to add more sur-
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from round audio if desired.
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the KICKER威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source.
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
The remote sound system controls are located on the display which is located in the instrument cluster.
surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o’clock
The VOLUME button controls the sound
positions.
level of the sound system. Press the top of
the VOLUME button to increase the sound
VOLUME level. Press the bottom of the VOLUME
Button button to decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the

Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
MODE
Button
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed

Remote Sound System Controls when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/ 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SE- wiping from center to edge.
LECT button to operate various radio, me-
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
FUNCTION dia, and Universal Customer Interface ing the disc.
SELECT (UCI) functions (i.e., advance presets, select
Button next folder, jump to or start playing songs 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
in playlists, etc., depending on which radio or anti-static sprays.
is in the vehicle and if equipped with UCI).
5. Store the disc in its case after playing. 4
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to
seek up and down radio stations, tracks, 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
SCROLL chapters, files, etc., depending on which too high.
Button radio is in the vehicle.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
precautions:
good disc before considering disc player service.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Manual Temperature Controls
Blower Control to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the
The rotary knob on the left controls the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting.
blower. The control has an OFF posi- Rotating the control to the extreme right provides the
tion and four speed settings. The warmest setting.
blower will remain on until the con-
Mode Control
trol is turned to the OFF position or
The rotary knob on the right controls
the ignition is turned OFF.
airflow distribution. Dots between
each of the mode selections identify 4
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
intermediate modes that allow the op-
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
erator to fine-tune airflow distribu-
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
tion. The mode settings are as follows:
position.
Temperature Control • Defrost
The rotary knob in the center controls Air is directed to the windshield through the
air temperature. Rotate the control to outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
the left for cooler air temperature and directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only • Panel
when necessary. Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
• Defrost/Floor
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the • Recirculation Control
side window demister grilles. The mode control knob also controls the recir-
culation feature. You can choose Bi-Level Re-
• Floor
circulation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
outlets, or a mix or both while in this mode.
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
Normally, air enters from outside the vehicle. However,
through vents under the front seats.
when in Recirculation mode air inside the vehicle is
• Bi-Level re-used. Use this mode to cool the inside of the vehicle
Air flows through the outlets located in the instru- rapidly. The Recirculation mode can also be used to
ment panel and through the outlets located on the temporarily block out outside odors, smoke, and dust.
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
can be closed to partially block airflow.
Air Conditioning Control Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Press this button to turn the air conditioning on
and off. When the air conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets selected with the mode control. Press
this button a second time to turn off the air conditioning.
An indicator in the button will illuminate when compres-
sor operation is selected. 4
Automatic Temperature Controls

Automatic Operation
The Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically
maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the
comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning 72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
time without affecting automatic operation.
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you Pressing the air conditioning control button while
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver in AUTO mode will cause the indicator in the
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort control button to flash three times and then turn off. This
level is selected, the system will maintain that level indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and request-
automatically using the heating system. Should the de- ing the air conditioning is not necessary.
sired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
The system will automatically control recircu-
will automatically make the adjustment.
lation. However, pressing the recirculation con-
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply trol button will temporarily put the system in
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting Recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
completely and closes the outside air intake. dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recircula-
tion will cause the indicator in the control button to
illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
normal AUTO mode function and the indicator will turn modes will cause the indicator in the control button to
off. blink and then turn off.
NOTE: Manual Operation
• The surface of the climate control panel and the top This system offers a full complement of manual override
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
debris due to the location of the climate control mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor automatic. This means the operator can override the 4
operation of this system. blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
temp/humidity conditions will cause captured inte- NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control
rior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. operation chart that follows for details.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Bi-Level
change airflow distribution by rotating the mode control Air flows through the outlets located in the instru-
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions. ment panel and through the outlets located on the
floor. Air flows through the registers in the back of the
• Defrost
center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers
Air is directed to the windshield through the
can be closed to block airflow.
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side • Panel
window demister grilles. Air flows through the outlets located in the instru- 4
ment panel. Air flows through the registers in the
• Defrost/Floor
back of the center console to the rear seat passengers.
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
These registers can be closed to block airflow.
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is
also directed to the front door windows through the • Air Conditioning Control
side window demister grilles. Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air con-
• Floor
ditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
flow through the outlets selected with the mode control
the instrument panel and into the rear seating area
dial. Press this button a second time to turn off the air
through vents under the front seats.
conditioning. An indicator in the button illuminates Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
when manual compressor operation is selected. will cause the indicator in the control button to blink and
then turn off.
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position. Operating Tips
• Recirculation Control NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
This button can be used to block out smoke, suggested control settings for various weather condi-
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling tions.
is desired. The Recirculation mode should only
Summer Operation
be used temporarily. An indicator in the button
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
illuminates when the Recirculation mode is active. You
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
may use this feature separately.
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
fog, press the recirculation button to return to outside air. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 for proper
Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured coolant selection.
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibil-
ity. For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in Defrost or Defrost/Floor mode.
Winter Operation NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is long periods, as fogging may occur.
not recommended because it may cause window fogging.
Outside Air Intake
Vacation Storage Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, 4
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility slush, and snow.
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
A/C Air Filter
Window Fogging The climate control system filters outside air containing
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 252
▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual 5
▫ Extreme Cold Weather Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 ▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission —
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 249 ▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 䡵 Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) – 5.7L Engine Only . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 All-Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . 264
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 274
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 275
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 282
䡵 Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 283
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 298
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 289 ▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 ▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . 290 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 291 䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 5
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ 2.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 ▫ 3.5L And 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
䡵 Self-Sealing Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 310
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 ▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . 314
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
䡵 Recreational Towing
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . 316
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . 316
▫ Two-Wheel Drive And All-Wheel Drive . . . 329
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
STARTING PROCEDURES Automatic Transmission
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat before shifting into any driving gear.
belts.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving ing precautions are not observed:
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
number of reasons. A child or others could be a complete stop.
5
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
fob in the ignition switch. A child could operate vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
power windows, other controls, or move the ve- is at idle speed.
hicle. • Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked into any forward gear when the engine is above
vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may idle speed.
cause serious injury or death. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Normal Starting (Tip Start) If Engine Fails To Start
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
WARNING!
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal. • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
causing serious personal injury.
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the could enter the catalytic converter and once the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
“Normal Starting” procedure. and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
Extreme Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C) booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail- erly. Refer to Section 6 for proper jump-starting
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended. procedures and follow them carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” proce- The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded,
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and three-wire extension cord.
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
Module.
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. 5
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 sec-
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
onds before trying again.
electrocution.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
CAUTION! It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
ing precautions are not observed:
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
a complete stop.
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at firmly on the brake pedal.
idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL General Information
into any forward gear when the engine is above The automatic transmission selects individual gears au-
idle speed. tomatically, dependent upon:
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal. • Altitude
• Vehicle loading
• Driving style
• Shift lever position • The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
• Accelerator position
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
• Vehicle speed vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and pre-
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, de-
cision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
pendent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics. The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
NOTE:
position, the brake pedal must be firmly pressed before
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to 5
the shift lock will release.
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold. Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to turn
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
the ignition switch to the LOCK position before re-
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
starting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up
lever is in the DRIVE or REVERSE position.
to 10 seconds after restart if the ignition switch is not
turned to the LOCK position first.
result in a slightly different feeling or response during
WARNING!
normal operation in the DRIVE position. After the trans-
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure mission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
Key Ignition Park Interlock
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key fob
prior to turning the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
from the ignition switch, and apply the parking
The key fob can only be removed from the ignition switch
brake. Once the key fob is removed from the ignition
when the ignition switch is in the LOCK position and
switch, the transmission shift lever is locked in the
once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
PARK position, securing the vehicle against un-
wanted movement. Furthermore, you should never Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
leave unattended children inside a vehicle. This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
Over-Temperature Mode PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the trans- position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
mission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds nor- position, the ignition switch must be turned to any other
mal operating temperature, the transmission will change switch position (ACC, ON, or START) (engine running or
the way it shifts to help control the condition. This may not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Brake/Transmission Interlock Manual Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access
port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever
gate.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position
without starting the engine. 5
2. Firmly set the parking brake.
Interlock Manual Override
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
4. Using the screwdriver, press and hold the override tab
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
through the access port on the center console.
7. Reinstall the override cover.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
NOTE: Under extreme cold temperatures (-6°F (-21°C)
and when in DRIVE, transmission operation may be
briefly limited to only second gear operation. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the The following indicators should be used to ensure that
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • When shifting into PARK move the shift lever all the
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an REVERSE
uphill grade. This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE. 5
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
possible injury or damage. turned from the LOCK to the ON position.
NEUTRAL “D” (Overdrive)
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for This range is used for most city and highway driving. It
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine provides the smoothest up shifts and down shifts and the
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you best fuel economy. Select the “3” range when frequent
must leave the vehicle. transmission shifting occurs when using the Overdrive
range, such as when operating the vehicle under heavy
CAUTION! loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
head winds, or while towing heavy trailers).
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis- NOTE:
sion damage. • If the vehicle is started in cold temperatures, shifts into
Overdrive may be delayed. Normal Overdrive and
shifting operation will resume when the temperature
WARNING!
of the transmission reaches the appropriate tempera-
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ture. Refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe Clutch” later in this section.
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
• If the transmission temperature gets too hot, the occur only to prevent engine overspeed while downshifts
transmission may downshift out of Overdrive or en- occur earlier than in other gear range selections.
gage Overdrive at higher vehicle speeds until the
transmission cools down. After cooldown, Overdrive CAUTION!
will resume normal operation.
Never race the engine with the brakes on and the
“3” (Third) vehicle in gear, and never hold the vehicle on an
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transmis- incline without applying the brakes. These practices
sion will operate normally in 1st, 2nd, and 3rd while in can cause overheating and damage to the transmis-
this range. The “3” position should also be used when sion.
descending steep grades to prevent brake system dis- 5
tress. Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
added to the automatic transmission in this vehicle. A
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
clutch within the torque converter engages automatically
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly differ-
sive shifting and heat buildup.
ent feeling or response during normal operation in high
“L” (Low) gear. When the vehicle speed drops or during accelera-
This range should be used for engine braking when tion, the clutch automatically and smoothly disengages.
descending very steep grades. In this range, upshifts will
NOTE: Transmission Limp Home Mode
• The torque converter clutch will not engage until the The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
transmission fluid and engine coolant is warm (usu- If a condition is detected that could cause damage, the
ally after 1–3 miles [1.6–4.8 km] of driving). Because transmission automatically shifts into second gear. The
engine speed is higher when the torque converter transmission remains in second gear despite the forward
clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis- gear selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will
sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is continue to operate. This reset feature allows the vehicle
considered a normal condition. Pulling the shift lever to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
into the “3” position will show that the transmission is damaging the transmission.
able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the be reset to regain all forward gears.
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
• Stop the vehicle and shift into PARK.
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
transmission fluid partially draining from the torque • Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, then
converter into the transmission. This is considered a start the engine.
normal condition and it will not cause damage to the
• Shift into DRIVE and resume driving.
transmission. The torque converter will refill within
five seconds of shifting from PARK into any other gear
position.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the 5
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the The following indicators should be used to ensure that
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake. you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking • When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise way forward and left until it stops and is fully seated.
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
panel to ensure it is in the PARK position.
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
CAUTION!
uphill grade.
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
WARNING! moved out of PARK before the ignition switch is
turned from the LOCK to the ON position.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply parking brake fully
REVERSE
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and
This range is used for moving the vehicle rearward.
possible injury or damage.
Always stop before moving the shift lever to REVERSE.
NEUTRAL DRIVE
This range is used when the vehicle is standing for This range should be used for most city and highway
prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
may be started in this range. Set the parking brake if you shifts and the best fuel economy.
must leave the vehicle.
The transmission automatically upshifts through fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
CAUTION!
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in transmis-
sion damage.
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- 5
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威/Elec-
WARNING! tronic Range Select (ERS) mode to select a lower gear.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe During cold temperature operation, you may notice
practices that limit your response to changing traffic delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
or road conditions. You might lose control of the temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
vehicle and have an accident. proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Turn OFF the engine.
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode. 5. Restart the engine.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
return to normal operation.
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK, If the transmission cannot be reset, see your authorized
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Sec- dealer.
ond gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Mal-
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
function Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
be reset to regain all forward gears. To reset the trans- diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
mission, use the following procedure: recur.
1. Stop the vehicle. Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
AutoStick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS) in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever to the left (D-) or
Your vehicle may be equipped with Autostick威 or Elec- right (D+) will change the top available gear. The trans-
mission will not shift above the indicated gear, but will
tronic Range Select (ERS) to provide greater driver control
shift up and down normally (automatically) through the
of automatic transmission operation. Refer to “AutoStick威”
in this section. lower gears. Holding the shift lever to the left (D-) will
Electronic Range Select (ERS) — If Equipped shift the transmission to the lowest gear possible (with-
Electronic Range Select (ERS) allows the driver to limit out overspeeding the engine) for maximum engine brak-
the highest available transmission gear, providing you ing. Holding the shift lever to the right (D+) for a few
with more control of the vehicle. ERS allows you to seconds will disengage ERS mode.
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts, AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED 5
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
can also provide you with more control during mountain manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
driving, trailer towing, and other situations. the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
ERS Operation braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
When the shift lever is in the Drive position, the trans- and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
mission will operate automatically, shifting between the can also provide you with more control during passing,
five available gears. Moving the shift lever to the left (D-) city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
will activate ERS, downshift the transmission, and dis- trailer towing, and many other situations.
play the top available gear in the instrument cluster. Once
Autostick姞 Operation To disengage Autostick威 mode, hold the shift lever to the
When the shift lever is in the Drive position, the trans- right (D+) for a few seconds. You can shift in or out of the
mission will operate automatically, shifting between the Autostick威 mode at any time without taking your foot off
five available gears. To engage Autostick威, simply move the accelerator pedal.
the shift lever to the right or left (D+/D-) while in the
DRIVE position. The gear position will display in the ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
instrument cluster. In Autostick威 mode, the transmission This vehicle is equipped with an active on-demand
will shift up and down when left or right (D-/D+) is All-Wheel Drive (AWD) system which makes available
manually selected by the driver. It will remain in the optimum traction for a wide variety of road surface and
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho- driving conditions. The system minimizes wheel slip by
sen. The transmission will automatically downshift as the automatically redirecting torque to the front and rear
vehicle slows to a stop (to prevent engine lugging) and wheels as necessary.
will display the current gear. Tapping the shift lever to To maximize fuel economy, your AWD vehicle automati-
the D+ position (at a stop) will allow starting in second cally defaults to rear-wheel drive (RWD) when road and
gear. After a stop, the driver should manually upshift environmental conditions are such that wheel slip is
(D+) the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated. unlikely to occur. When specific road and environmental
conditions require increased levels of road traction, the
vehicle automatically shifts into AWD mode. Automatic
AWD operation could be activated by outside tempera- DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
ture, wheel slip, or other predetermined conditions (there
Acceleration
may be a slight delay for AWD engagement after a wheel
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
slip condition occurs). AWD can also be manually se-
pery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull errati-
lected by moving the shift lever into the Autostick威 mode
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
(+/-) or activating the windshield wipers for an extended
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
period of time.
(driving) wheels.
NOTE: If the “t CASE” or “SERVICE AWD SYSTEM”
warning message appears after engine start up, or during WARNING!
driving, it means that the AWD system is not functioning 5
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
properly and that service is required. Refer to “Electronic
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
Vehicle Information Center” in Section 4 of this manual.
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
CAUTION! possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
All wheels must have the same size and type tires. (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the front differential and/or
the transfer case.
Traction DRIVING THROUGH WATER
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Driving through water more than a few inches/centime-
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road ters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause prevent damage to your vehicle.
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
Flowing/Rising Water
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
WARNING!
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
slushy.
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
visible.
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
4. Keep tires properly inflated. warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution • Driving through standing water may cause dam-
and Warning before doing so. age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
CAUTION! transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of con-
tamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
• Always check the depth of the standing water appearance) after driving through standing water.
before driving through it. Never drive through Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of appears contaminated, as this may result in further
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
5
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
• Determine the condition of the road or the path Vehicle Limited Warranty.
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
the way before driving through the standing wa- cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
ter. internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
The standard power steering system will give you good
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water. steering capability if power assist is lost.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehi- If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop- still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. parking maneuvers.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you NOTE:
stranded. • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in inju- travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
ries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, there is a problem with the power steering system.
and others around you. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
does not in any way damage the steering system. apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
WARNING! rized dealer.
Continued operation with reduced power steering CAUTION!
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible. Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
CAUTION!
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering WARNING!
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
occur. with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
Power Steering Fluid Check not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined power steering fluid.
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all PARK position first and then apply the parking brake.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
PARKING BRAKE otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
The parking brake should always be applied when the nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
driver is not in the vehicle. PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
WARNING! curb on an uphill grade.
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
when parked to guard against vehicle movement and parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
possible injury or damage. then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake 5
failure and an accident.
Parking Brake
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
turn on when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle stability and brake performance under most
ignition switch is ON. braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents • The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle. • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you of the stop.
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is WARNING!
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h). • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference caused
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or by improperly installed or high output radio trans-
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in- mitting equipment. This interference can cause
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Instal-
debris, or panic stops. lation of such equipment should be performed by
You also may experience the following when the brake qualified professionals.
system goes into Anti-Lock: (Continued)
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need the safety of others.
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys- All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af- accurate signals for the computer.
5
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded. MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) – 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
can prevent accidents.
(Continued) NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake Sys- The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
System (BAS), and the Electronic Stability Program (ESP). traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
All four of these systems work together to enhance ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi- sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
tions. very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydrau- that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
lic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help others.
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in Section 5 of this Traction Control System (TCS)
manual. This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
WARNING!
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake ma- The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
neuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situ- from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
ation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those re-
can help reduce braking distances. sulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe,
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must 5
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
others.
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESP/TCS Indicator
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
maintain the desired path. accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
conditions.
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
WARNING!
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
the condition of oversteer or understeer. from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those result-
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ing from excessive speed in turns, driving on very
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, at-
appropriate for the steering wheel position. tentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must never
The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” located in the
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
others.
active. The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” also
The ESP system has two available operating modes: ESP on again, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and
the “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will turn off.
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most driving conditions. sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
The ESP should only be turned OFF for specific reasons “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the ESP OFF
as noted in the following paragraphs. switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn the ESP on again by momentarily press-
Partial Off
ing the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
vehicle is in motion. 5
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This Synchronizing ESP
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more combined with BAS indicator. If the power
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows. supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indi-
The ESP OFF switch is located on the switch bank in the
cator Light” may illuminate with the engine running. If
center of the instrument panel. To enter the “Partial Off”
this should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to
mode, momentarily press the ESP OFF switch and the
the left and then to the right. The “ESP/BAS Malfunction
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
Indicator Light” should go out. However, if the light ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
authorized dealer as soon as possible. problem diagnosed and corrected.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and NOTE:
ESP/TCS Indicator Light • The “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn on momen-
combined with the BAS indicator. The “ESP/ tarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and the position.
“ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the instrument
• Each time the ignition switch is turned to the ON
cluster both come on when the ignition switch is turned
position, the ESP system will be on even if it was
to the ON position. They should go out with the engine
turned off previously.
running.
• The ESP control system will make buzzing or clicking
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indica-
sounds when it is active. This is NORMAL; the sounds
tor Light” on continuously while the engine is running if
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
it detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilome-
ters) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
Tire Markings
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. 5
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
1 — U.S. DOT Safety 4 — Maximum Load
Standards Code (TIN) ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and • Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
Temperature Grades spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T” • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
tion. Example: T145/80D18 103M. into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits) 5
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the side of the tire.
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information about
Tire Placard Location the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed 2) total weight your vehicle can carry
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Placard 4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire and Loading Information Placard

Loading To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section the weight referenced here.
of this manual.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg. trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five NOTE:
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of • The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
[295 kg]). and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for 5
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity • For the following example, the combined weight of
calculated in Step 4. occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
Safety
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading WARNING!
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
cause accidents.
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
overload them.
sult in tire over-heating and failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can 5
Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure.
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve- driver’s side “B” Pillar.
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left. Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom- Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
mended cold tire inflation pressure. maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy Information” section of this manual.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption. when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
CAUTION!
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al- when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent the Winter.
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
which could damage the valve stem.
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not 5
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
temperature changes. tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- Radial Ply Tires
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading WARNING!
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
WARNING! on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your combine them with other types of tires.
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
75 mph (120 km/h). authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only. Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
(80 km/h). Temporary use spare tires have limited compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear result.
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited- 5
use spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare. vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
on the vehicle at any given time.
vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING! WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or 30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could speed.
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tire Spinning Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not to help you in determining when your tires should be
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) replaced.
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
5
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
1 — Worn Tire follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
2 — New Tire
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread in serious injury or death.
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
WARNING!
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance pension dimensions and performance characteris-
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire. able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
The service description and load identification will be sion components. You could lose control and have
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend approved for your vehicle.
that you contact your original equipment or an autho- • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire capacity, other than what was originally equipped
specifications or capability. on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
SELF-SEALING TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
A non-hardening viscous sealant applied to the inner
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having liner of each tire fills punctures up to 0.19 in (5 mm) to
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire minimize the loss of air pressure. This contributes to the
failure and loss of vehicle control. safety of the vehicle by significantly reducing the prob-
ability of a roadside stop due to a flat tire.
CAUTION!
TIRE CHAINS
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size Use only compact chains or other traction aids that meet
may result in false speedometer and odometer read- SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the 5
ings. proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer. In addition, only install tire chains on
P215/65 R17 and P225/60 R18 size tires. The P245/45
R20 size tires do not provide adequate clearance for tire
chains.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the • Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pave-
following precautions: ment.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires • Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
and other suspension components, it is important on the method of installation, operating speed,
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro- and conditions for use. Always use the lower
ken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the suggested operating speed of the chain manufac-
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could turer if different from the speed recommended by
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged the manufacture.
parts of the chain before further use.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
possible and then retighten after driving about 1⁄2
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instruc-
mile (0.8 km).
tions on method of installation, operating speed, and
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
conditions for usage.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
(Continued)
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer sug- Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
gest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain different loads and perform different steering, driving,
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains. and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
SNOW TIRES terns.
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
designation on the tire sidewall. aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain 5
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only smooth, quiet ride.
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not being performed.
be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h).
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
reversed. mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to the “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in this section for information on how to properly
inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
Tire Rotation
increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
and natural pressure loss through the tire. (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the 5
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
sure value.
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and or condition.
warning have been established for the tire size
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
while adjusting your tire pressure.
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors stopping ability.
may result.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor. level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
the tire. can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
Base System
when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
cause the TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
sound.
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module. Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the 5
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
and to maintain the proper pressure.
active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop as
The TPMS consists of the following components: soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
• Receiver module,
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
• Four TPM sensors, and system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
• TPM Telltale Light
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the wheel housings.
TPMS to receive this information.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
Check TPMS Warning
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. Vehicles with Full Size Spare
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
fault can occur due to any of the following: that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors. 3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
materials that may block radio wave signals.
in any of the four active road tires.
Vehicles with Compact Spare Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
Premium System — If Equipped
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure 5
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on readings to the receiver module.
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for and to maintain the proper pressure.
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
• Receiver module,
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale • Four TPM sensors,
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
• TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
and inflate all of the tires with low pressure (including
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display one or
those flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s
more low pressure messages (Left Front, Left Rear, Right
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
Front, Right Rear) for three seconds and a graphic
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
pressure values flashing.
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for
three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being 5
received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat, Vehicles with Full Size Spare
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place 2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
following: upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
the TPM sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
15 mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
materials that may block radio wave signals.
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
wheel housings.
Vehicles with Compact Spare
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
flashing pressure value. (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYS-
information. 5
TEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display dashes General Information
(- -) in place of the pressure value. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
following conditions:
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will • This device may not cause harmful interference.
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
• This device must accept any interference received, in-
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
cluding interference that may cause undesired operation.
pressure value.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow- 3.5L and 5.7L Engine
ing licenses: The 3.5L and 5.7L engine is designed to
meet all emissions regulations and provide
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123 satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123 mance when using high-quality unleaded
gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 89. The manufacturer recommends the use
2.7L Engine of 89 octane for optimum performance. The use of
The 2.7L engine is designed to meet all premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
emissions regulations and provide excel- provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these en-
lent fuel economy and performance when gines.
using high-quality unleaded “regular” Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
use of premium gasoline is not recom- high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
gasoline in these engines. as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance, ates are required in some areas of the country during the
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom- winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci- Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
fications, if they are available. your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
CAUTION!
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.” DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
5
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe- Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im- and driveability problems and may damage critical
prove air quality. fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or E85
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
turer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from methanol,
fuel system components.
it does not have the negative effects of methanol.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles • drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain- More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol exposure to E-85 fuel.
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• poor cold start and cold drivability without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
E-85 perform the following: look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• change the engine oil and oil filter can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor-
• disconnect and reconnect the battery nia reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
conditions and they would result in additional cost. overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
fuel. malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
Fuel System Cautions • The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. 5
CAUTION! Most of these products contain high concentra-
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance: performance problems resulting from the use of
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law. such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor- the manufacturer.
mance and damage the emissions control system.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions con-
(Continued) trol system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
monoxide poisoning: drive with all side windows fully open.
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon • Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the ADDING FUEL
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
the vehicle. left side of the vehicle. If so equipped, use the finger pull
to open the door. Otherwise, push in on the left side (near
(Continued)
the edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door Gas Cap Tether Hook

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
CAUTION!
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement. • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into • A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
the fuel system. portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc- could be burned. Always place gas containers on
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on. the ground while filling.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel NOTE:
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full. • Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
WARNING! on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the refueled.
tank filled. • When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is tank is full.
running.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
(Continued) If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a Vehicle Certification Label
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this the rear of the driver’s door.
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
The label contains the following information:
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time • Name of manufacturer
the vehicle is started.
• Month and year of manufacture
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in Section 7. • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front 5
VEHICLE LOADING • Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated. • Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires, wheels,
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and
GVWR. rear GAWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The best way to figure out the total weight of your
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or it is not over the GVWR.
rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
WARNING!
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
GVWR.
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Loading TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty In this section, you will find safety tips and information
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before review this information to tow your load as efficiently
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you and safely as possible.
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
hicles used for trailer towing.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way 5
the brakes operate. Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
NOTE:
you in understanding the following information:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
GAWRs. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
tire pressure.
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or tem- It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a control of the vehicle and have an accident.
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale. Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
and trailer when weighed in combination.
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
Frontal Area
allowance for the presence of a driver.
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) width of the front of a trailer.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
Trailer Sway Control
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
rear GAWR.
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
swaying motions while traveling. contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
Weight-Carrying Hitch
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
WARNING! 5
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
Weight-Distributing Hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
performance, and could result in an accident.
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the • Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro- hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable rec-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent reational vehicle dealer for additional information.
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of Max. Trailer Hitch
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional Class
Industry Standards
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
package content.
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
The following chart provides the industry standard for Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Class IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Duty
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
for your given drivetrain. drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW Max. Tongue Wt.
(Gross Trailer Wt.) (〫 see note)
2.7L & 3.5L Rear Wheel 22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (454 kg) 100 lbs (45 kg)
Drive (RWD) Automatic
3.5L All Wheel Drive 32 sq ft (2.97 sq m) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
(AWD) & 5.7L Automatic
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
〫 NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and 5
cargo, and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire and Loading Information” placard. Refer
to “Tire–Safety Information” in this section.
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the weight
on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
WARNING!
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for as safe as possible:
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
for your vehicle. and it will not shift during travel. When trailering
Towing Requirements cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive- can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
train components the following guidelines are recom- control. You could lose control of your vehicle and 5
mended: have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
CAUTION! overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or dam-
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may dam- suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
age your vehicle.
(Continued)
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

• Safety chains must always be used between your 2. GTW
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to 3. GAWR
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and (This requirement may limit the ability to always
allow enough slack for turning corners. achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a percentage of total trailer weight.)
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic Towing Requirements — Tires
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
the trailer wheels.
spare tire.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow − Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
ratings are not exceeded: “Tires–General Information” in this section for infor-
1. Max loading as defined on the “Tire and Load- mation on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
ing Information” placard. procedures.
(Continued)
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres- − An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage. required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Infor-
brake controller is not required.
mation” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure. − Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Informa-
(907 kg).
tion” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
CAUTION! 5
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
limits. loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
WARNING!
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake motoring safety.
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four and seven-
brakes when you need them and could have an
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
accident.
ness and connector.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for ad- NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
ditional space between your vehicle and the ve- wiring harness.
hicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
in an accident. but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins 4 — Park 1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn 2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn 3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
Towing Tips specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer tow-
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, ing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from for the proper maintenance intervals.
heavy traffic.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Automatic Transmission
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
a lower gear range using the “3” range (if equipped) or drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
the AutoStick威/ERS feature (if equipped). you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Selecting a lower gear range while operating the − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve maximize fuel efficiency.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
Autostick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS) — If
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
Equipped
provide better engine braking.
− By using the Autostick威/Electronic Range Select (ERS)
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 min-
mode and selecting a specific gear range, frequent
utes of continuous operation, then change the automatic
shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range should
transmission fluid and filter according to the interval
be selected that allows for adequate performance. For
example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be − Air Conditioning
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain Turn off temporarily.
the desired speed.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at Two-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel Drive
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground)
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows. is allowed ONLY if the rear driveshaft is removed and
the transmission is in NEUTRAL (for both RWD and
Cooling System AWD vehicles). 5
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions: CAUTION!
− City Driving Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in ments can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
− Highway Driving covered under your new vehicle warranties.
Reduce speed.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . 334 ▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 6
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
▫ Jacking And Changing a Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
▫ Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Wheel Cover Or Center Cap Installation —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists. system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position. heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage WARNING!
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
• Getting under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
service.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never get any part of your
WARNING! body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start 6
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the (Continued)
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the “Cooling System Pressure Cap”
paragraph.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
NOTE: The spare tire must be removed in order to Opening The Access Panel
access the jack.
1. Open the trunk.
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare tire.
6
Jack Fastener
Spare Tire Fastener
WARNING!
4. Remove the spare tire.
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
5. Remove the fastener securing the jack. hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Preparations for Jacking 3. Place the shift lever into PARK.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the 4. Turn OFF the ignition.
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
areas.
6. Block the front and rear of the
WARNING! wheel diagonally opposite of the jack-
ing position. For example, if changing
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
the right front tire, block the left rear
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
wheel.
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
2. Set the parking brake.
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking and Changing a Tire
WARNING! • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: jack.
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
the vehicle. for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
be raised. careful of motor traffic.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are 6
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
REVERSE. valve stem facing the ground.
(Continued) (Continued)
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
Jack Warning Label

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and lug wrench.
2. If equipped with steel wheels, do not remove the Center Cap Removal
wheel cover at this time. If equipped with aluminum
wheels where the center cap covers the lug nuts, use the
lug wrench to pry the center cap off carefully before
raising the vehicle.
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with the metal edges
and retention teeth.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to

loosen, but not remove, the lug nuts on the wheel with
the flat tire. Turn the lug nuts counterclockwise one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
6
Lug Nut Removal/Installation
1 — Tighten
2 — Loosen
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to firmly
engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the sill flange.
Jack Engagement Locations

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire 8. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the lug
and install the spare tire. nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts. To
avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
WARNING! tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to
the ground.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and 9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough handle counterclockwise.
to remove the tire.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate
6. Remove the lug nuts, wheel cover (if equipped), and
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The
tire. Remove the cover by hand. Do not pry it off.
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If 6
7. Mount the spare tire. in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with a center cap or
service station.
wheel cover, do not attempt to install it on the compact
spare. However, when reinstalling the road tire, follow 11. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire. Make sure the base
the procedure under “Wheel Cover or Center Cap Instal- of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
lation” in place of the remaining steps in this procedure. down the fastener.
• This tire is designed as an emergency spare only. Do
WARNING!
not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) speed.
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve- WARNING!
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
the places provided.
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
Compact Spare Tire
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold tire
The compact spare tire is for temporary emergency use
inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or
with radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly. Replace
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
(or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
stalled at the first opportunity.
result in loss of vehicle control.
• Keep tire inflated to 60 psi (414 KPa) cold inflation
pressure.
Wheel Cover or Center Cap Installation — If
Equipped
NOTE: Do not attempt to install a center cap or wheel
cover on the compact spare.
1. Mount the road tire on the axle. For vehicles equipped
with wheel covers, perform Steps 2 and 3. For vehicles
equipped with center caps, proceed to Step 4.
2. Install two lug nuts on the mounting studs, which are
on each side of the stud that is in alignment with the
valve stem. Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end
of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
6
Tire and Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is lowered to 2 — Valve Notch 5 — Mounting Stud
the ground. 3 — Wheel Lug Nut
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand, service station.
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
7. For vehicles equipped with center caps, install the
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
center cap by hand. Do not use a hammer or excessive
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped force to install the center cap.
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
8. Stow the jack, tools, and spare tire. Make sure the base
nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
of the jack faces the rear of the vehicle before tightening
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle is
down the fastener.
lowered to the ground.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack WARNING!
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
wrench while tightening for increased leverage. Alternate hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
lug nuts until each nut has been tightened twice. The the places provided.
correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lb. (135 N·m). If
in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmis- • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution that can
sion cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could cause serious burns; do not allow battery fluid to
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has contact eyes, skin or clothing. Wear safety glasses
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If and protect your eyes at all times. If acid splashes
the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may in your eyes or on your skin, flush contaminated
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This type area immediately with large quantities of water.
of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow • A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
this procedure carefully. mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not lean over battery when
WARNING! attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each 6
other.
Failure to follow these warnings could result in
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster
personal injury or death:
source that has a greater than 12 Volt system, i.e.,
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when- do not use a 24 Volt power source.
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by the
should not be disconnected and should only be
fan.
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in 3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmis-
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the sion in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
engine compartment for jump-starting. position on both vehicles.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry 4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an cal loads.
inadvertent electrical contact.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine com-
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but partment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another. positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
WARNING!
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this of the booster battery and then to the ground (-) of the
could establish a ground connection and personal vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
injury could result. a good contact on the ground. Refer to the following
illustration for jump-starting connections.
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are be-
low the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought above the 6
Jump-Starting freezing point before attempting jump-start.
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Ground
3 — Front of Vehicle
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic
Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
battery. can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan. front wheels. Then shift back and forth between RE-
VERSE and DRIVE. Using minimal accelerator pedal
WARNING! pressure to maintain the rocking motion, without spin-
ning the wheels, is most effective.
Any procedure other than above could result in:
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) —
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
if equipped, or Traction Control System (TCS) — if
the battery vent.
equipped before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
Brake Control” in Section 5 for further information.
explosion.
CAUTION!
Any procedure other than above could result in
damage to charging system of booster vehicle or of
immobilized vehicle.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between Without The Ignition Key
1st and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only ap-
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast proved method of towing without the ignition key is
may lead to transmission overheating and failure. with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h). Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Flatbed towing is recommended. DO NOT tow an AWD
WARNING! vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground unless the
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
rear driveshaft is removed and the transmission is in 6
NEUTRAL.
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could Vehicles WITHOUT AWD may be towed (with rear wheels
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi- on the ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL under
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for the following conditions:
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- • The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near (24 km).
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

Exceeding these towing limits may cause transmis- • Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
sion failure. the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
Vehicles equipped with AWD can be towed with the vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans-
transmission in NEUTRAL and the rear wheels OFF the mission may result.
ground (or the rear driveshaft removed) with no limita-
tion on speed or distance. If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
CAUTION! not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front remains in NEUTRAL.
with sling-type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result. Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
• If the transmission is not operative or if the A Tow Dolly
vehicle is to be towed more than 15 miles (24 km), The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
then the only approved method of towing is with vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
a flatbed truck. Otherwise, damage to the trans-
mission may result.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.5L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
䡵 Engine Compartment — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 356 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Front Side
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Marker Lamp — Models With Halogen
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam

Headlamp, And Park/Turn Lamp — Models
▫ All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . 382 With High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 ▫ Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, Tail/Turn
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Lamp, And Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 406
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.7L
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

2 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Coolant Pressure Cap 9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
1 — Integrated Power Module 6 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 8 — Engine Oil Dipstick
4 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 9 — Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
5 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic further damage to the emissions control system. It
transmission control systems. When these systems are could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis- tests can be performed.
sions well within current government regulations. • If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al- Loose Fuel Filler Cap
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
soon as possible. ”gASCAP” message will appear in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
problem continues, the message will appear the next time ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
the vehicle is started. ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the MIL. which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE do the following:
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- 3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction this test over. 7
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II 4. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing. position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen: ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station. REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your warranty.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready. available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
any procedure yourself. The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING! may require servicing or replacement in the future.
You can be badly injured working on or around a CAUTION!
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a form repairs and service when necessary could
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me- result in more costly repairs, damage to other
chanic. components or negatively impact vehicle perfor- 7
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
that protect the performance and durability of dipstick. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of oil when the reading is
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance at the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these engines.
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi- CAUTION!
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
because of component malfunction, use only the loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Checking Oil Level — 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
Checking Oil Level — 2.7L and 3.5L Engines be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to fully warmed engine is shut off.
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of whichever occurs first.
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
Engine Oil Selection
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
For best performance and maximum protection under all
on these engines.
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
CAUTION!
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
Change Engine Oil
been certified by the American
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Petroleum Institute (API). The 7
manufacturer only recommends
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
API Certified engine oils.
information on this system.
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
CAUTION!
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” under “Starting and
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the Operating” for more details.
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.7L and 5.7L
Engines Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.5L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating SAE 10W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature temperatures.
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- ment” in this section.
ment” in this section.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifi-
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
Engine Oil Filter Selection
are followed.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
Materials Added to Engine Oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
detection dyes, to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engi- quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
neered product and its performance may be impaired by service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
supplemental additives. filter and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, proper maintenance intervals. 7
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
WARNING!
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air cleaner
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
Maintenance-Free Battery
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
near the engine compartment before starting the
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
maintenance required.
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury. NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
Battery Location clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories 7
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
should not be disconnected and should only be at the start of each warm season. This service should
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented). include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
CAUTION! time.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the CAUTION!

battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi- system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi- Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other service be performed by authorized dealers or other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book, lo-
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
cated on the DVD, for further warranty informa-
sor Oil, and Refrigerants.
tion.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant A/C Air Filter
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger 7
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
should be done by an experienced technician. installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove the used
filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the When performing other underhood services, the hood
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this). cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
proper maintenance intervals. year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Body Lubrication
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
lock cylinder.
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- Windshield Wiper Blades
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts tions of salt or road film.
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. blades clean. This will help blade performance.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend- To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
performance of blades may be present with chattering, exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any condition is rating information can be found on most washer fluid
present please proceed to clean wiper blades with humid containers.
cloth removing any debris that may be affecting its
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
function.
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
Adding Washer Fluid Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped).
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the WARNING! 7
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
must be exercised when filling or working around
residual water.
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
system. monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, CAUTION!
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effective-
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised ness of the catalyst as an emissions control device
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. and may seriously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure against you.
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage. WARNING!
CAUTION! A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv- where your exhaust system can contact anything that
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor- can burn.
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with a severe In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
7
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
vehicle. safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage: Cooling System
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
WARNING!
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion. • When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is tempera-
vehicle.
ture controlled and can start at any time the
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires ignition switch is in the ON position.
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic • You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions. you see or hear steam coming from under the
hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
flushed, and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
of the radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc.
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub- dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
proper maintenance intervals.
leaks.
Selection of Coolant
7
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than • This vehicle has not been designed for use with
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may propylene glycol-based engine coolant (anti-
result in engine damage and may decrease corro- freeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the Adding Coolant
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
possible. coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
nance period, it is important that you use the same
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
(Continued) Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威 Anti-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
freeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT
the vehicle is operated.
(Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
(antifreeze) and distilled water. Use higher concentra-
will require more frequent engine coolant (antifreeze)
tions (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F
changes.
(⫺37°C) are anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant,
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
and to ensure that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
7
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
WARNING!
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre- to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or any ground spills immediately.
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
Coolant Level
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
pressure.
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one indicated on the bottle.
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
Disposal of Used Coolant engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool-
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
coolant bottle. Do not overfill. freezing.
Points to Remember • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor- coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and distilled water for
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine proper corrosion protection of your engine, which
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. contains aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
7
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle. equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may if the brake system warning light indicates system fail-
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas ure.
mileage, and increased emissions.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per-
Brake System forming underhood services.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
system components should be inspected periodically.
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
proper maintenance intervals.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
WARNING! cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the require-
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting ments described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
possible brake damage. You would not have your full leak and a checkup may be needed.
braking capacity in an emergency.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
WARNING! has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
damage your brake system and/or impair its per- failure. This could result in a accident.
formance. The proper type of brake fluid for your • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
vehicle is also labeled on the original factory spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also 7
(Continued) damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued) CAUTION!

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami- • Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
failure. This could result in an accident. converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed will result in more frequent fluid and filter
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
moisture. ine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Automatic Transmission • The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
Fluid Level Check
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
damage to the transmission may occur. Your au-
If you notice fluid loss or transmission malfunction, have thorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level. fluid level accurately.
Fluid and Filter Changes Special Additives
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
proper maintenance intervals. product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
fluid and filter should be changed.
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
Selection of Lubricant leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the they may adversely affect seals.
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis- CAUTION!
sion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New 7
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used.
All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The all wheel drive system consists of a transfer case and
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
front differential. The exterior surface of these compo-
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
nents should be inspected for evidence of fluid leaks.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
Confirmed leaks should be repaired as soon as possible.
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
The transfer case fluid fill/inspection plug is located in on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
the middle of the rear housing. To inspect the transfer highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
case fluid level, remove the fill/inspection plug. The parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
fluid level should be even with the bottom of the hole. nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
Use this plug to add fluid as required. extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
The front differential fill plug is located on the outer
underbody protection.
cover near the halfshaft attachment. To inspect the differ-
ential fluid level, remove the fill plug. The fluid level The following maintenance recommendations will enable
should be even with or slightly below the bottom of the you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hole. resistance built into your vehicle.
Fluid Changes What Causes Corrosion?
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
proper maintenance intervals. paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are: • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
• Stone and gravel impact. scratch the paint.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. CAUTION!
Washing Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
metal and painted surfaces.
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
Special Care 7
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
a month.
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
and open. has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner. chrome-plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use MOPAR威
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonabrasive,
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos-
non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring pads, steel wool,
sible. The cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only MOPAR威 or
sibility of the owner.
equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven cleaner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’ protective
packaged and sealed. finish.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Interior Care
Equipped Use MOPAR威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- upholstery and MOPAR威 Carpet Cleaner or equivalent
ner: for carpeting.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
with a clean, dry towel. cloth, or MOPAR威 Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
mended for leather upholstery.
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose Cleaner
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
or equivalent high quality cleaner to a clean, damp cloth
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
7
and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
soap residue.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
protectants on Stain Repel products. taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi- wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
WARNING!
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial house-
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. hold-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Cleaning Headlights not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and scratch the elements.
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
lowed by rinsing. must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild FUSES
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
Integrated Power Module
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
with a clean damp rag.
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
2. Dry with a soft tissue. relays.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the 7
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console. Integrated Power Module
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
CAUTION! Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse
• When installing the integrated power module cover, Fuse
it is important to ensure the cover is properly 1 — 15 Amp Washer Motor
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may Blue
allow water to get into the integrated power module 2 — 25 Amp Powertrain Control
and possibly result in an electrical system failure. Natural Module (PCM)
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to 3 — 25 Amp Ignition Run/Start
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. Natural
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated 4 — 25 Amp Alternator/EGR
may result in a dangerous electrical system over- Natural Solenoid
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it 5 — — —
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be 6 — 25 Amp Ignition Coils/Injectors/
corrected. Natural Short Runner Valve
7 — — —
8 — 30 Amp Starter
Green
9 — — —
Cavity Car- Mini- Description Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse tridge Fuse
Fuse Fuse
10 30 Amp — Windshield Wiper 15 50 Amp — Radiator Fan
Pink Red
11 30 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake System 16 — — —
Pink (ABS) Valves - 17 — — —
if equipped 18 — — —
12 40 Amp — Radiator Fan 19 — — —
Green
20 — — —
13 50 Amp — Anti-Lock Brake System
Red (ABS) Pump Motor - 21 — — —
if equipped 22 — — —
14 — — — 7
Rear Power Distribution Center
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
Opening The Access Panel

CAUTION! Cavity Car- Mini- Description

tridge Fuse
• When installing the power distribution center Fuse
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is prop- 1 60 Amp — Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
erly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so Yellow Cavity 1 of the Rear
may allow water to get into the power distribution Power Distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system Center contains a black
failure. IOD fuse needed for
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to vehicle processing
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. during assembly. The
service replacement
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
part is a 60 Amp yellow
may result in a dangerous electrical system over- cartridge fuse.
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
2 40 Amp — Integrated Power 7
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be Green Module (IPM)
corrected.
3 — — —
4 40 Amp — Integrated Power
Green Module (IPM)

Fuse Fuse
5 30 Amp — Heated Seats - 13 * — — —
Pink if equipped 14 — 10 Amp AC Heater Control/
6 — 20 Amp Fuel Pump Red Cluster/Security
Yellow Module - if equipped
7 — — — 15 — 20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake
8 — 15 Amp Diagnostic Link Connec- Yellow Module - if equipped
Blue tor (DLC)/Wireless 16 — — —
Control Module 17 — 20 Amp Cluster
(WCM)/Wireless Yellow
Ignition Node (WIN) 18 — 20 Amp Selectable Power Outlet
9 — 20 Amp Power Outlet Yellow
Yellow 19 — 10 Amp Stop Lights
10 — — — Red
11 * — — — 20 — — —
12 * — — — 21 — — —

Fuse Fuse
22 — — — 30 — 10 Amp Door Modules/Power
23 — — — Red Mirrors/Steering
24 — — — Control Module (SCM)
25 — — — 31 — — —
26 — — — 32 — — —
27 — 10 Amp Occupant Restraint 33 — — —
Red Controller (ORC) 34 — — —
28 — 10 Amp Ignition Run 35 — 5 Amp Antenna Module -
Red Orange if equipped/Power
Mirrors
29 — 5 Amp Cluster/Electronic Sta- 7
Orange bility Program (ESP) - if 36 — 25 Amp Hands-Free Phone - if
equipped/Powertrain Natural equipped/Video Moni-
Control Module (PCM)/ tor - if equipped/Radio
STOP LIGHT Switch 37 — 15 Amp Transmission
Blue

Fuse Fuse
38 — 10 Amp Cargo Light/Satellite 43 30 Amp — Rear Window Defroster
Red Receiver (SDARS) Pink
Video - if equipped/ 44 20 Amp — Amplifier - if equipped/
Vehicle Information Blue Sunroof - if equipped
Module - if equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
39 — 10 Amp Heated Mirrors - if
Red equipped (circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an autho-
rized dealer. The cluster and the driver seat switch (if
40 — 5 Amp Auto Inside Rearview
Orange Mirror - if equipped/ equipped) are fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in
Heated Seats - if Cavity 11. The passenger seat switch (if equipped) is
equipped/Switch Bank fused by the 25-Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 12. The
41 — — — door modules, the driver power window switch, and the
passenger power window switch are fused by the 25-
42 30 Amp — Front Blower Motor
Pink Amp circuit breaker in Cavity 13. If you experience
temporary or permanent loss of these systems, see your
authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than
21 days, you may want to take these steps to protect your Interior Bulb Number
battery. Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Overhead Console Reading Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of Visor Vanity Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will Shift Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Optional Door Map
possibility of compressor damage when the system is Pocket / Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
started again. (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Exterior Bulb Number BULB REPLACEMENT

Low Beam Headlamp (Standard Halogen) . . . . . . 9006 Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Low Beam Headlamp – Park/Turn Lamp, and Front Side Marker Lamp —
High Intensity Discharge (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1S Models with Halogen Headlamps
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005 1. Open the hood.
Front Park/Turn Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157A
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
Front Fog Lamp — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp
Front Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer) assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counter-
Tail/Turn Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3057 clockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp assembly.
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921 CAUTION!
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the head-
lamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
3 — Park/Turn Lamp Bulb

7
1 — High Beam Headlamp Bulb

2 — Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge Headlamps (HID)
HID Headlamps
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
4 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Backup Lamp, Side Marker Lamp, Tail/Turn Lamp,
and Tail/Stop Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove two fasteners from the back of the taillamp
assembly.
3. Pull back the trunk liner.

4. Remove the remaining fastener from the back of the
7
taillamp assembly.
5. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side. 8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly.
6. Disconnect the electrical connector.
1 — Backup Lamp Bulb

7. Pull the taillamp assembly clear from the vehicle to
access the bulbs.
2 — Side Marker Lamp Bulb 3 — Tail/Turn Lamp Bulb

7
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the
taillamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
11. Reinstall the taillamp assembly, fasteners, electrical
connector, and trunk liner.
12. Close the trunk.
4 — Tail/Stop Lamp Bulb

License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
1 — License Lamp Bulb

2 — Socket 7
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
2.7 Liter Engine 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive 18 Gallons 68 Liters
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive 19 Gallons 72 Liters
5.7 Liter Engine 19 Gallons 72 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.7 Liter Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6.0 Quarts 5.7 Liters
U.S. Metric
Cooling System *
2.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile 9.9 Quarts 9.4 Liters
Formula or equivalent)
3.5 Liter Engine without All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/ 11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.5 Liter Engine with All Wheel Drive (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 11.4 Quarts 10.8 Liters
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine without Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威 14.7 Quarts 13.9 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine with Severe Duty II Cooling System (MOPAR威 15.1 Quarts 14.3 Liters
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level. 7
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil (2.7L Engine) Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to the engine oil fill cap for
correct SAE grade.
correct SAE grade.
correct SAE grade.

Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs (2.7L Engine) TE10MCC5 (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (3.5L Engine) ZFR5LP–13G (Gap 0.050 in [1.27 mm])
Spark Plugs (5.7L Engine) LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection (2.7L Engine) 87 Octane
Fuel Selection 87 Octane Acceptable — 89 Octane Recommended
(3.5L and 5.7L Engines)
7
Chassis
Automatic Transmission MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威 DOT 3 and SAE J1703 should be used or equivalent. If DOT 3
brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recom-
mended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W90 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Rear Axle API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent.
Transfer Case MOPAR威 Transfer Case Lubricant for BorgWarner 44–40 or equivalent.
M
A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES I
N
T
E
N
CONTENTS A
N
C
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 410 E
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 S

C
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 412 H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 410 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
N The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
T must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
E
N the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped
A system. These and all other maintenance services in-
N vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the
cluded in this manual, should be done to provide best
C EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
E vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
change is necessary.
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
S conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
C
H driving. in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
E will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
D Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
U malfunction is suspected. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
L indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
E NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emis-
S vice is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
8 serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
(805 km).
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 411 M
A
NOTE: Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator I
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor themessage after completing the scheduled oil change. If a N
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’sscheduled oil change is performed by someone other T
E
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change, N
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT referring to the steps described under “Oil Change A
illuminated. Required” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center N
C
(EVIC)” in Section 4 or under “Odometer/Trip Odom- E
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
eter” under “Instrument Cluster Descriptions” in Sec-
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time. S
tion 4.
C
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals H
At Each Stop for Fuel
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, which- E
ever comes first. D
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under
U
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7. L
E
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if S
required. 8
A
I Once a Month At Each Oil Change
N
T • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
E damage.
N • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
A • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
N as required. CAUTION!
C
E • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake Failure to perform the required maintenance items
S master cylinder, and power steering, add as needed. may result in damage to the vehicle.
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct Required Maintenance Intervals
E operation.
D Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
U pages for the required maintenance intervals.
L
E
S
8
A
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or 12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service I
N
6 Months Maintenance Service Schedule T
Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires. N
filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the A
❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. N
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) C
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. E
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
S
12 months.
C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or H
12 months. E
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for D
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date
8
Repair Order # Dealer Code Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or 24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
N
T 18 Months Maintenance Schedule
E Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil ❏ Rotate tires.
A filter. ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
N ❏ Rotate tires. engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C ❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD). ❏ Inspect the CV joints.
S
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
C
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
E damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
D
U
L
E
S
8 Odometer Reading Date Odometer Reading Date

A
N
30 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) C
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD). E
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
5.7L Engines). ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
C
Wheel Drive (AWD). damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. H
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles E
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
S
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
C
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
D ❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
U front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
L frequent trailer towing.
E
S

A
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or I
N
54 Months Maintenance T
Service Schedule E
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
filter. A
❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the C
E
front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive
(AWD). S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Odometer Reading Date
8
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer

A
I 60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines).
N ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
S ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
C (AWD).
H
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles (170 000 km).
E
D ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
U replace if necessary.
L
E
S
8 Odometer Reading Date

A
N
66 Months Maintenance Schedule T
Service Schedule ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
❏ Inspect exhaust system. H
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for E
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. D
U
L
E
S
8

A
N
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
S
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

A
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service I
N
Schedule T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. A
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines). N
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. † C
❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD).
S
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service 102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
N
T Schedule 102 Months Maintenance
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule
N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter.
N engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires.
C ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) ❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.5L
Engines).
❏ Inspect the CV joints. ❏ Replace the timing belt (3.5L Engine).
S
❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
C
H ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for not done at 60 months.
D ❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the
U front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or
L frequent trailer towing.
E
S

A
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service 114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or I
N
Schedule 114 Months Maintenance T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule E
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. A
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
T
E ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
A ❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped)
N ❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and 5.7L Engines).
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S ❏ Inspect exhaust system.
C ❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
H
replace if necessary.
E
D ❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
U ❏ Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing — All Wheel Drive
L (AWD).
E ❏ Replace the accessory drive belt (2.7L/3.5L Engines).
S
8 Odometer Reading Date

A
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or 126 Months Maintenance Service I
N
Schedule T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. E
❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid. Inspect the front axle fluid — All Wheel Drive (AWD). A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8

A
I 132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service 138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
N
T Schedule 138 Months Maintenance
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule
N ❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter.
N engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires.
S
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S

A
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service 150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or I
N
Schedule 150 Months Maintenance T
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter. Service Schedule E
❏ Rotate tires. ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil N
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the filter. A
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary. ❏ Rotate tires. N
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped) ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter. C
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary. E
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.7L and
❏ Inspect the CV joints. 5.7L Engines). S
❏ Inspect exhaust system. ❏ Inspect the transfer case fluid — All C
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for Wheel Drive (AWD). H
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary. ❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles E
❏ Change the rear axle fluid and on models equipped with All Wheel Drive (AWD) change the equipped with four-wheel disc brakes. D
front axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or U
frequent trailer towing. L
E
S
8

A
I † This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
N to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
T warranty.
E
N
A WARNING!
N
C • You can be badly injured working on or around a
E motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
S have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
C you have any doubt about your ability to perform
H a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
E
D mechanic.
U • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
L
E vehicle could result in a component malfunction
S and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
8 could cause an accident
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 431 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 434
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 432 ▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 432
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
9
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
430 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 431
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
YOUR VEHICLE At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know. facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
Be Reasonable With Requests the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
9
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
solved with this process. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Phone: (800) 992-1997
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
ship. They want to know if you need assistance. P.O. Box 1621
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Phone: (800) 465–2001
center. In Mexico contact:
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
ter should include the following information: Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address In Mexico City: 5081-7568
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office) Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Authorized dealership name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
Impaired (TDD/TTY) manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni- within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer have any questions about the service contract, call the
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hot-
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter line at 1-800-521-9922.
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
Service Contract contract documents, and contact the person listed in
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle those documents.
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected 9
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle.
concerns.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
WARNING! MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals operating at its best.
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi- REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
individual problems between you, your authorized defect to the Canadian government should write to: Trans-
dealer, and the manufacturer. port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To order the following manuals, you may use either the
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
http://www.safercar.gov. for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
• Service Manuals • Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the in- These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
formation that students and professional technicians assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts. Call toll free at:
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals • 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia- • 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
Or
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve- Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by- • www.techauthority.com
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
TIRE QUALITY GRADES habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
The following tire grading categories were established by teristics and climate.
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
Traction Grades
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
your vehicle.
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
requirements in addition to these grades. concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart 9
Temperature Grades
WARNING!
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat The temperature grade for this tire is established for
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and heat buildup and possible tire failure.
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
INDEX
10
440 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,58
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 374 Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 52,56,58
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 363 All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,382
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,235 Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 373,374,404
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,367 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,274
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366,367 Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232,235,366 Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 17
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,58 Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,57,62,76,171 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
INDEX 441
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Torque Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 258,262
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29,30 Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . 176,185 Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 235
Automatic Transaxle Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 254,259,380,381 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,408 Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346,364
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,76
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,259 Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,259 Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
10
442 INDEX
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378,408 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,312
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,232
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 73 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Check Engine Light
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,395Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Calibration, Compass .................. . . . 190 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65,66,69,71
Capacities, Fluid . . . .................. . . . 404 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Caps, Filler Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . .................. . . . 312 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Oil (Engine) . . . . . .................. . . . 362
Power Steering . . . .................. . . . 269
INDEX 443
Cleaning Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 375
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,200,209 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,376
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 373,404,406
Connector Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 219 Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,387
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
10
444 INDEX
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Driving
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Through Flowing, Rising,
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,234,239 Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Dipsticks Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Disposal Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 387
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 140
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 170
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 182
INDEX 445
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Emergency, In Case of Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Multi-Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,404,406
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,185,361
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 357,410 Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,354,355 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,404
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353,354,355 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 59
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373,406 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,312 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,312,370
10
446 INDEX
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,370 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Fluid Level Checks
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Filters Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,367 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,406 Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 406
Flashers Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,174
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,133,171 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Flat Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
INDEX 447
Gasoline (Fuel)
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Gauges
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,406 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,259
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16,24,115,307
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,318
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316,317
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 145 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,356
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
10
448 INDEX
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Hazard Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 133
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Hitches
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 145
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 133 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,13
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,137 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
INDEX 449
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,169 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Kicker Sound System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,51
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 68,69
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,395
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
10
450 INDEX
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,130 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,398
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51,57,62,76,171 Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,137
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,173
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,169
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,144 Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,144
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,133 Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 278 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 170 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 181
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,144
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,174 Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . 135
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,144
INDEX 451
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,396 Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 181 Lower Anchors and Tether for
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 CHildren (LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 178,298 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,132,133,171
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 169 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315,317 Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 181,357
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134,144
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10
452 INDEX
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,56,59
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52,56,58
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,406
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,174
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,174
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,185
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,185
Mode Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360,406
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176,185,361
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358,434 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Multi-Displacement Engine System . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363,406
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
INDEX 453
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,404 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362,404 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,357 Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 283
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 145 Power
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 154
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171,332 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,435 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,269
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
10
454 INDEX
Pretensioners Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Programming Transmitters Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 375 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 230
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Remote Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 176,185
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
INDEX 455
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,42
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,41,76 Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 46 Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65,66,71 Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 373,406
10
456 INDEX
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Self-Sealing Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Sound System
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290,291,334
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Specifications
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433 Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Service Engine Soon Light Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197,200,209 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,247
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,254,259 Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,133,171 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
INDEX 457
Steering Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 235
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268,269 Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 170,333
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Steering Wheel Mounted Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,395 Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,395 Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 283
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,287,437
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 50 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333,337
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
10
458 INDEX
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336,337 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283,284 24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,287 Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 329
Self-Sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
INDEX 459
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,174
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,39
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382,408 Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,171
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250,254,259,380 uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254,259 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 219
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Transmitter Battery Service Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 145
Transmitter Programming Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 19 Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
10
460 INDEX
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284,315,317 Water
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241,395 Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 17 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,153
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning Lights Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,234,239
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,137
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136,137,369 Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

2010 Charger

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Charger

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Charger

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

Key Fob With RKE Transmitter

NOTE: • Battery at an acceptable charge level

Child Lock Control

Window Lockout Switch

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your

Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - Airbags

Tether Strap Mounting

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

WARNING! ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

Automatic Dimming Mirror

Power Mirror Control

• Press the button to begin.

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Voice Commands Voice Commands

Manual Seat Adjusting Bar

Power Seat Switch

Power Seat Recline Switch

Lumbar Support Control Lever

Adjustable Head Restraint Removing Head Restraint

Hood Release Lever

Hood Safety Catch

Intermittent Wiper System

TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN

ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED Adjustable Pedals Switch

Front Power Outlet

Front Seat Cupholders

Rear Seat Cupholders

1 — Air Outlet 7 — Climate Control 13 — Hood Release

28. Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator

Fuel Saver Mode — On Fuel Saver Mode — Off

All Wheel Drive (AWD) to Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)

Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) to All Wheel Drive (AWD)

MPEG Sampling Playback of MP3 Files

MPEG Sampling Playback of MP3 Files

Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the

If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed

Automatic Temperature Controls

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Tire and Loading Information Placard

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

Fuel Filler Door Gas Cap Tether Hook

CAUTION! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued)

Four-Pin Connector Seven-Pin Connector

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

Jack Warning Label

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the lug wrench to

Jack Engagement Locations

CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued)

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 ▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam

▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 ▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

▫ Rear Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . 390 䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 406